53422e PDF

@FANUC
GE Fanuc Automation
Computer Numerical Control Products
AC Spindle Motor Series
Descriptions Manual
GFZ-53422£/09 September 1988
GFL-001
I Warningl
The product described in this publication may employ hazardous voltages
or might create other conditions that could, through misuse, inattention, or
lack of understanding, result in personal injury, or damage to the product
or to other equipment. It is imperative, therefore, that personnel involved
in the installation, maintenance, or use of this product understand the
operation of the product and the contents of this publication.
This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While
efforts have been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not
purport to cover all details or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for
every possible contingency in connection with installation, operation, or maintenance.
Features may be described herein which are not present in all hardware and software
systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes no obligation of notice to holders of this
document with respect to changes subsequently made.
GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or
statutory with respect to, and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy, completeness,
sufficiency, or usefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of
merchantability or fitness for purpose shall apply.
The following are trademarks of GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.
Alarm Master CIMSTAR Helpmate PROMACRO Series Six

CIMPUCITY GEnet Logicmaster Series One Series 90
CIMPUCITY 90-ADS Genius Modelmaster Series Three VuMaster
CIMPUCITY PowerTRAC Genius PowerTRAC Pro Loop Series Five Workmaster
ccopyright 1993 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

All Rights Reserved
This manual describes the following products:
Series name Model name
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR MODEL 1, MODEL 2, MODEL 3, MODEL 6,

MODEL 8, MODEL 12, MODEL 15, MODEL 18,
Standard series MODEL 22, MODEL 30, MODEL 40
380/415 VAC input series MODEL 30HV, MODEL 40HV
Digital AC Spindle MODEL 3, MODEL 6, MODEL 8, MODEL 12,

servo unit MODEL 15, MODEL 18, MODEL 22
Grease MODEL 2H, MODEL 3H, MODEL 6H,

lubrication MODEL SH, MODEL 12H, MODEL 18H,
High-speed series MODEL 22H
series
(Digital) Oil-air
MODEL 2VH, MODEL 3VH, MODEL 6VH,
lubrication
MODEL 12VH
series
MODEL SP, MODEL 12P, MODEL lSP,

Power-up series
MODEL 18P, MODEL 22P, MODEL 30P,
(Digital)
MODEL 40P, MODEL SOP
Note) For the S series AC spindle motors, refer to the S series AC spindle
motor Description manual B-65012E.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
I. AC SPINDLE MOTOR STANDARD series

1. GENERAL I-1
2. FEATURES I-1
3. SPECIFICATIONS I-3
3.1 List of Specifications ••••o••••••••••••••••••••••••••········· I-3
3.2 Output/Torque .Characteristics •••••••••••••••••••••••••••.••... I-4
4. CONFIGURA.TION ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••.•••.• I-9
5. CONNECTION •••••••••••••••• ~ ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••.• I-10
6. CAUTIONS IN USE I-13
II. AC SPINDLE SERVO UNIT (MODELS 1 - 40)

1. GENERA!, •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• II-1
2. FEATURES II-1
3. CONFIGURATION •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••.•••••• II-2
3.1 Configuration ..........•...................................... II-2
3.2 Types of Units and Their Combinations II-3
4. SPECIFICATIONS II-4
4.1 Spindle Control Unit II-4
4.1.1 Specifications II-4
4.1.2 Functions II-4
4.2 Resistor Unit II-7
4.3 Connectors II-7
4.4 Fuses II-8
4.5 DA Converter (Option) II-9
4.5.1 DA converter (BCD) II-9
4.5.2 DA converter (BINARY) II-10
4.6 Spindle Orientation Circuit (Option) II-10
4.7 Spindle Speed Gain Switch Circuit (Option) II-10
4.8 Power Transformer (Option) II-ll
4.9 Unit Cover (Option) II-14
4.10 Fan Unit II-14
4.11 Unit Adaptor (Option) II-14
5; INSTALLATION ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••.•••••••. II-15
5.1 Environmental Requirement II-15
5.1.1 Ambient temperature II-15
5.1.2 Humidity ..........••.......•.............................. II-15
5.1.3 Vibration .................. o o . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . II-15
5. 1. 4 Atmosphere ....•........................................... II-15
5.2 Input Power Supply and Grounding •••••••••••••••••••••••••.••.• II-15
5.3 Caloric Value of Units •••••••.•••••••••••••••••.•••..••••••••. II-18
5.4 Maintenance Area II-18
5.5 Cable Routing ....••.... o • • • • • • • • • • o • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • II-18
5.6 Notes on Mounting II-19
5.6.1 Spindle servo unit ....................................... . II-19
5.6.2 Resistor unit ............................................ . II-20
6. CONNECTIONS II-21
6.1 Total Connection Diagram •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• II-21
6.2 Detailed Connection Diagram •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••.• II-21
6.2.1 Connection diagram of the power supply .............•...... II-21
6.2.2 Connection diagram of the AC spindle servo unit
and the magnetics cabinet II-22
and the AC spindle motor II-25
and their resistance unit ..•.••..•••••••••..•..•..•..•.•• II-28
and the fan unit ........................................ . II-28
7. DESCRIPTIONS ON INTERFACE SIGNAL •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• II-29
7.1 Interface Signal Standards II-29
7.2 Spindle Control Signals II-32
7.2.1 Emergency stop signal (ESP 1, 2) II-32
7.2.2 Machine ready signal (MRDY 1, 2) II-33
7.2.3 Forward rotation command signal (SFR) •••••••••••••••••••• II-35
7.2.4 Reverse rotation command signal (SRV) •••••••••••••••••••• II-35
7.2.5 Code signal (option) II-36
7.2.6 Analog voltage singal (DA2, E) II-37
7.2.7 +15V power supply (+15, E) II-39
7.2.8 Spindle rotation speed override (OVR 1, OVR 2) ••••••••••• II-40
7.2.9 Torque limit command signals (TLML, TLMH, OT) •••••••••••• II-42
7.2.10 Alarm reset signals (ARST 1, 2) II-44
7.2.11 Soft start/stop cancel signal (SCON) (for MODEL 30, 40) II-44
7.3 Orientation Signal II-45
7.4 Spindle Control Output Signals II-45
7. 4.1 Speed arrival signals (SARI, 2) II-45
7.4.2 Zero-speed detecting signals (SST 1, 2) II-48
7.4.3 Speed detecting signals (SDT 1, 2) II-49
7.4.4 Spindle alarm signals (ALM 1, 2) II-51
7.5 Alarm Signals II-52
7.6 Speed Indication Voltage (SMl, OM) II-57
7.7 Load Indicator Voltage (LMl, OM) II-58
III. DIGITAL AC SPINDLE SERVO UNIT (MODELS 3 - 22)

1. OUTLINE ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• III-1
2. FEATURES III-1
3. CONFIGURATION AND ORDER NUMBER •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• III-2
3.1 Configuration ............................................... . III-2
3.2 Types of Units and Their Combinations III-3
4. SPECIFICATIONS III-4
4.1 Spindle Control Unit ......................................... III-4
4.1.1 Specifications III-4
4. 1. 2 Functions III-4
4.2 Resistor Unit ................................................ III-7
4.3 Connector .................................................... III-7
4.4 Fuses III-7
4.5 DA Converters (Option) III-7
4.6 Spindle Orientation Circuit (Option) III-7
4.7 Power Transformer (Option) .•.....•........................... III-7
4.8 Unit Cover ..•...•............................................ III-7
4.9 Fan Unit ......................•...•.......................... III-7
4.10 Unit Adaptor III-7
5. CONNECTIONS III-7
5.1 Total Connection Diagram ...........•.......•................. III-7
5.2 Details of Connection Diagram •••••••••••••.•••••••••••••••••• III-7
5.2.1 Power connection ............•........•..•......•......... III-7
S.2.2 Connection between AC spindle servo unit and
magnetic cabinet ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• III-7
S.2.3 Connection between AC spindle servo unit and
AC spindle motor III-7
6. RIGID TAPPING ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• III-8
IV. AC SPINDLE MOTOR HIGH-SPEED series (MODELS 2H-22H, 2VH-12VH)

1. GEN'ERAI.. • • • • • • • • • •••• • • • • • •••••• • •• • • • • • ••• • • • • • ••••• • • ••••••••••• IV-1
2. FEATURES ......................................................... IV-1
3. SPECIFICATIONS ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• IV-2
4. OUTPUT CHARACTERISTICS IV-3
4.1 High-speed Series (Grease Lubrication) IV-3
4.2 High-speed Series (Oil-air Lubrication) IV-6
•.
s. CAUTIONS ON USE •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••.•••••••••• IV-8
v• AC SPINDLE MOTOR POWER-UP series (MODELS 8P-SOP)

.1. GEN'ERA.L • • • ••• • • • •••• • ••••••••• • • •• • ••••••••• • •••• • • • • ••••••• • •••• V-1
2. FEATURES V-1
3. SPECIFICATIONS ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• V-2
4. OUTPUT CHARACTERISTICS V-3
s. CONNECTIONS V-6
6. CAUTIONS ON USE V-8
VI. AC SPINDLE MOTOR 380/41S VAC INPUT series (MODELS 30HV, 40HV)
1. OUTLINE •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• VI-1
2. FEATU'ER.S ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• VI-1
3. SPECIFICATIONS VI-2
4. OUTPUT CHARACTERISTICS VI-3
s. CONFIGU'RA.TION •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• VI-4
6. CONNECTIONS •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• VI-S
6.1 Total Connection Diagram •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• VI-S
6.2 Connection •••...•.• .- .••••••••..••••.•••....•••.•..•••••.•.•... VI-S
6.2.1 Connection diagram of power supply for all models ••••••••• VI-S
6.2.2 Connection diagram between AC spindle servo
unit and power magnetics cabinet •••••••••••••••••••••••••• VI-S
6.2.3 Connection between AC spindle servo unit and
AC spindle motor •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• VI-6
6.2.4 Connection diagram between AC spindle servo
unit and fan unit ••.•••••••••••.••••••..•..••••.•••....••• VI-7
7. CAUTIONS VI-8
7.1 Difference of Functions and Specifications in
Spindle Control Units •••••••••.•••••••••••••.••••..•••••••••.• VI-8
7.2 Installation .••••••..•••••.•••••••..•.•••.•..•...••.•.•.••.•.• VI-8
7.3 Cautions on Mounting •..••••••••••••••••••.•••••••••••••••••.•. VI-8
7.4 Interface Signals VI-9
7.4.1 Interface signal specifications ••••••••••••••••••••••••••• VI-9
7.4.2 Spindle ~ontrol signal •..•••••••••••••••••••.••••••••••.•• VI-9
VII. SPINDLE ORIENTATION
1. GEN'ERAL • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • . . • • • • . • . • • . • • • • • • • • . • • • • . • • • • . . • • • • . . . • VII-1
2• FEATURES • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • VI I- 3
3. SPECIFICATIONS ..•.............•.........•......•............•.. VII-4
3.1 Position Coder Method ••..•............••......•...•........• VII-4
3.2 Magnetic Sensor Method .•..•••...•...•••.•.•.••.......•.....• VII-5
4. CONFIGURATION .•••••.••.••.•..••.•••••••••••••.. o •••••••••• o •••• VII-6
4.1 Position Coder Type (Stop position internal setting) •••••••• VII-6
4.2 Position Coder Type (Stop position external setting) •••••••• VII-6
4.3 Magnetic Sensor Type .•..•••••.•••••...•.••..•......•••.....• VII-7
5. OUTER DIMENSIONS ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• VII-8
5.1 Outer Dimensions of Option PCB •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• VII-8
5.2 Outer Dimension of Position Coder ••••••••••••••••••••••••••• VII-9
5. 3 Magnetic Sensor ............................................ . VII-12
5.3.1 Magnetic sensor type ••.••.•.•••..••••••.•......•.......• VII-12
5.3.2 Magnetizing element outer dimensions ••••••••••••••••..•• VII-13
5.3.3 Magnetic sensor outer dimensions •••••••••••••••••••••••• VII-16
5.3.4 Cautions in use ...••..••..••.•.....•••...•....•....•..•. VII-17
6. CONNECTION DIAGRAM ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• VII-18
6.1 Interface (For position coder) •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• VII-18
6.1.1 Connection when synchronous feed position coder is
concurrently used for lathes and machining centers •••••• VII-19
6.1.2 Connection for machining center spindle
orientation only •••..•.•••••••..•••••••.•••••..••.•...•• VII-20
6.1.3 Stop position external setting connection ••••••••••••••• VII-21
6.2 Interface (For magnetic sensor) ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• VII-22
6.2.1 Magnetic sensor connection •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• VII-23
7. SIGNALS ••••••.•.•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• VII-24
7.1 Description of Signals
(In case of up to 2-stage speed change gear spindle) •••••••• VII-24
7.1.1 Orientation command signal (ORCMl, 2) ••••••••••••••••••• VII-25
7.1.2 Orientation completion signal (ORARl, 2) •••••••••••••••• VII-26
7.1.3 Spindle high/low speed signal (CTH) ••••••••••••••••••••• VII-27
7.2 Description of Signals
(In case of 3-stage speed change gear spindle) •••••••••••••• VII-28
7.2.1 Spindle medium speed signal (CTM) ••••••••••••••••••••••• VII-28
7. 3 Se.quences ••.•••. • ..••..•••••••..•••••••••••••••..••••.••.••• VII-29
7.3.1 Orientation command issued while stopping ••••••••••••••• VII-29
7.3.2 Orientation command issued during high-speed rotation ••• VII-30
7.4 Description of Signals (In case of stop position
external setting type, position coder system)
(In case of A06B-6041-J111) •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••.••• VII-31
7.4.1 Orientation command signals (HOI to H12-0L) ••••••••••••• VII-31
8. DETECTOR SPECIFICATIONS •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• VII-33

8.1 Position Coder .....••.....•.•.•.••..•.••.••........•......•. VII-33
8. 2 Magnetic Sensor ............................................ . VII-35
9. TWO MAGNETIC SENSORS ORIENTATION •••••••••••••••••••.••••••••••• VII-43
9. 1 General .................................................... . VII-43
9.2 Configuration ......•...••.•.••..••.......•...•.•......•..... VII-43
9.3 Change-over Circuit •...••.••••..••..•....•.•••••...••......• VII-44
9.3.1 Selection signal of magnetic sensor
(SB signal in the drawing) •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• VII-44
9.3.2 Signal change-over relay •••••••••••••••••••••••••••.•••• VII-44
9.4 Fine Adjustment for Stop Position ••••••••••••••••••••••••••• VII-45
10. ORDER SPECIFICATION •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• VII-46
VIII. SPINDLE SELECTOR CONTROL

1. INTRODUCTION ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• VIII-1
2. CONFIGURATION •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• VIII-1
2.1 Configuration ............•...........•...................... VIII-1
2.2 Order Specifications ........................................ VIII-2
3. FUNCTIONS ..................................................... . VIII-3
4. OUTER DIMENSIONS VIII-4
5. CONNECTIONS • •..•••••••.••••••••••.••••••.••.•••••••••.....•..••. VIII-6
5.1 Connection Diagram ......................................... . VIII-6
5. 2 Connector ...............•................................... VIII-7
6. INTERFACE •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• VIII-8
6.1 Input. Signal VIII-8
6.2 Output Signal VIII-9
7. SEQUENCE VII I-ll
8. CAUTIONS ON USE •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••. VIII-12
IX. VELOCITY GAIN SELECTOR CIRCUIT
1. GENERAL IX-1
2. FEATURES IX-1
3. CONFIGURATION •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• IX-1
4. EXTERNAL VIEWS IX-2
4.1 External View of Velocity Gain Selector Circuit
for MODEL 3 - 40 •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• IX-2
4.2 External View of Velocity Gain Selector Circuit
for MODEL 1, 2, and Small MODEL 3 IX-2
5. INTERFACE •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• IX-3
6. DETAILS OF SIGNALS IX-4
7. SEQUENCE IX-6
7.1 Sequence During Stop .••••.••..•...•••......••••......••..•.. IX-6
7.2 Sequence During High Speed Rotation ••••••••••••••••••••••••• IX-6
8. ORDER SPECIFICATION ••••••••••••••••••••••.••••••••••••••••••.•• IX-7
x. BUILT-IN SENSOR SIGNAL CONVERSION CIRCUIT

1. GENERAL •••••••••••••••••••••••••.••••••••••••••••.••••••• X-1
2. FEATURES X-1
3. CONFIGURATION AND ORDER SPECIFICATIONS X-1
4. SPECIFICATIONS X-2
5. DIMENSIONS X-3
6. CONNECTION DIAGRAM (only for waveform conversion circuit) X-4
7. CABLE X-5
APPENDIX
APPENDIX 1 CONNECTION DIAGRAM •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• A-1
APPENDIX 2 CABLE ROUTING • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • A-6
APPENDIX 3 CABLE SPECIFICATIONS ····•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• A-9
APPENDIX 4 TECHNICAL DATA •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• A-16
1. HOW TO OBTAIN LOAD INERTIA REFLECTED TO MOTOR SHAFT •••••••••••• A-16
2. HOW TO FIND THE ACCELERATION TIME •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• A-19
3 • CUTTING AMOUNT OF MACHINE •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• A-22
4. CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL ••••••••• ~ ••••••••••••••••••••••• A-29
5. TAPPING •••••••.••••••••.••••••••••••.••••••••.••••••••••••••••• A-32
6. HOW TO FIND ALLOWABLE DUTY CYCLE ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• A-39
7. RESISTOR UNIT FOR MODELS 1, 2, SMALL MODEL 3 ••••••••••••••••••• A-41
8. HOW TO FIND THE ORIENTATION TIME ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••· A-44
APPENDIX 5 EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • A-4 7
APPENDIX 6 MA.INTENANCE AREA • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • A-9 7
APPENDIX 7 ORDER SPECIFICATIONS •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• A-100
I. AC SPINDLE MOTOR STANDARD series
1. GENERAL
The AC SPINDLE MOTOR series have been specifically developed as variable
speed AC spindle motors for NC machine tools.
These motors are fully reliable under severe operating conditions in
machine shops subjected to floating dust and cutting oil splash. Sir.ce
these motors are free of brushes and other consumable parts, periodical
inspection and maintenance are unnecessary.
The AC SPINDLE MOTORS having a unique stator cooling system show
high-speed and high-output characteristics with compact structures. Thus,
these motors can improve the performance of NC machine tools.
The AC SPINDLE SERVO UNITS have also been developed based on the latest
power electronic techniques. These units feature stable and smooth operation
with reduced vibrations and noises from low speed to high speed, and they can
obtain excellent response. They are also designed for energy-saving to obt~in
a high output with a low current.
The regenerative braking control (patent pending), electric spindle
orientation control (patent pending), and other unique functions fully m•·"" c
the requirements of the latest NC machine tools.
2. FEATURES
The AC SPINDLE MOTORS and AC SPINDLE SERVO UNITS provide vari,'u:-'

excellent features as follows.
·( 1) High reliability
o Fully enclosed motors assure safety use in machine shops subjected
to floating dust and cutting oil splash. They are free of brushes
and other consumable parts, and thus, periodical inspection and
maintenance are unnecessary.
o The servo units adopt a digital control system using the latest
microprocessor technique. They are composed of a small number of
parts which are total-inspected by automated inspection system
strictly. Thus, these motors and units are highly reliable.
( 2) Abundant series
o A wide variety of models (flange type and leg mounting type) ranging
from 2.2 kW to 45 kW (30-minute rating) are optionally selectable for
all NC machine tools, such as lathes, machining centers, etc.
( 3) Compact structure
o Since these motors adopt an air cooling system which directly co·' Ls
electromagnetic steel sheets for the purpose of enhancing the coolin~
capacity, compact motors can obtain high-speed and high-outpt:.;-
characteristics, irrespective of their totally enclosed structures.
o The control circuit and power circuit of the servo units are
compactly assembled, and these units require a small accommodation
space only. They can all be adjusted and checked from the front
panel.
I - 1
(4) High performance
o Since these motors feature a wide constant output range and a large
reduction gear ratio owing to high-speed design, they can obtain
higher cutting capacity in the low speed rotation area of spindle.
o The servo units are designed based on the latest power electronic
techniques. They assure stable and smooth drive with reduced
vibrations and noises over the entire range from low to high speed.
The AC spindle motors adopt the regenerative braking control system
(patent pending) which has conventionally been said to be difficult,
and these motors can return the rotating energy to a machine shop
power supply during their deceleration time, so that they can obtain
high acceleration-deceleration frequency with excellent deceleration
response.
(5) Abundant functions

o Since these servo units control the motors (rotating speed, rotating
direction, start-stop) according to signals from an NC as the
standard system, they can control the motors easily. They also
provide the DA converter, speed override input, speedometer output,
loadmeter output, electric spindle orientation control (patent
pending), and other functions (A part of these functions are
optional).
( 6) Easy mounting to NC machine tools

o These motors employ a rectangular frame to ml.nl.ml.ze the mounting
space with a low terminal box, and therefore, they can be employed
without interfering mechanical parts on the machine side. As for
flange type, since the cooling air is fed from the load side to the
counter-load side, the heat transfer to machine tools can be
minimized.
I - 2
3. SPECIFICATION
3.1 List of Specifications

Table 3.1 List of specification
8 12 15 18 22 30 40
Continuous kW 1.5 2.2 3. 7 5.5 7.5 ll 15 18.5 22 30 37

rated output(*l) (UP) (2.0) (3.0) (5.0) (7.4) (10) (14. 7) (20.1) (24.8) (29.5) (40.2) (49.6)
Output Rated output for kW 2.2*~ 3. 7*~ 5.5 7.5 ll 15 18.5 22 26 37 45
power 30 Dlnutes (UP) (3.0) (5.0) (7.4) (10) (14.7) (20.1) (24.8) (29.5) (3to.9) (49.6) (60.3)
50% ED rated kW 2. 2 3. 7 5. 5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 26 37 45
output (*1,*2) (UP) (3.0) (5.0) 0.4) (10) (14.7) (20.1) (24.8) (29;5) (34.9) (49.6) (60.3)
r------r---------------r-----r--_, ----- -- ~
Rotating I-B_a_•_e......csp:...e_e_d_ _ _ _r_:pm_+-3:...':...ooo_-+_1..:.,_5_oo_+-1..:.'_5o_o-1f-J:...,_so_o-l-J,:...S_o_o+1:...':...s_o_o+J..:,_s_o_o+J:...,_5_oo_ 1,500 1,150 !,ISO
speed
Hax'-um
- speed rpm 8,000 8 • 000 I< ~ 6000
ru·o 00 6 • 000 '6ooo~
4 • 500 '!~
6000- 4, 50o 4,5 0o 4,500 4,'00
,
1-::-----:--'---------t---t---t---+--1-~'.=... --·- - - · - - - -·-·· ----- -
Output torque
(Continuous rated N.m 4. 77 14.0 23.5 35.0 47.7 70 95.t, I 17.7 140 149 307
torque at constant (kg.cm) (49) 04. 3) (240) (357) (487) 014) (974) (1201) ( 1428) (2540) (31 JO) 1
rto'-:r;-'qc;u_e_r;.;•c.n_,g:...e:...)- - - - - - - - . + - - - f - - - + - - l - - - _ _ _ ·---·· - - - ! - - - + - - + - - + - - - · · - - ·
GD 2 kg.m 2 0.012 0.031 ~.086 0.086 0.36 0.36 0.36 0.72 0.72 1.49 1.49
1------------+---+---1---1--- - - ----- - - - - - - - - - -
3 Rotor inertia N.m.sec~ 0.003 p.0082 ~.022 0.022 0.0911 0.091 0.091 0.179 0.179 0.372 O.Jn
~ f---------(-kg=-·-cm_.•_•_c_>l-<_o_.o_3_l+<_o_._o8_>_l-<_o_.2_2_>~lc-o_._2......:2) ~o_._9_3) ~93) _<o_._9_3l _o_._81_>._<_1._s~ _<_3._8~ __
<J_.s_>
; \Ieight kg 18 27 60 60 110 110 110 190 190 290 290
~ --'-----L----'---.J.-·--'--·--. ---- · - - - · -
:- Cooling syst•.m Totally enclost.!:LI fan cooled
~ 1-------------- ------------------------------------------
Installation The output shaft should be hortzont;ll ur vt=rltcally lluwnwarc.l.
Allowable ovet"load capacity

(1 min.) (for rated 120..
output for 30 ainutes)
r--------------------t------------------------------------------------~
Insulation Class F
Ambient temperature 0 - 40°C
Vibrations VS VIO
Noise 75 dB (A) 80 dB (A) 75 dB (A) 80 dB (A)
Pa intlng color Munsell system N2. 5
Accessories Pulse generator and thermostat
AC spindle unlt model 1 2 3 6 8 12 15 1~122 \ 30 40-

Rated output current for ~ --+~--~-· '---"-'--
~~~m~i~nu~t~e~(A~C~)~-------------A_,____I_2__f-__1_9_,~_2_4-+---3-3-+----"-8-+---6-2-+---7-2-+---8-8 -~- _!~ 182
Power supply capacity at kVA 4 7 9 12 17 22 26 32 37 54 b3
j-..::30:.-.::m::.l:,:nu:.:t:.:•::•:...::r•:.:t:.:l.::n:.!!g'-------l----'----1--_i---L---J.---•·--- ___ . ___ ___ _ __
Power supply (*3) 200/220/230 VAC + 10'1., -15"<. 50/6011>. ! lllz
!:f---------------1----------------------------------·---------
§ Matn clrc:u1t Transistor PWH lnv~l"tP.r
g f---------------1----------------------------·· --------
: Feedback Vcluclty feedback by pul.st.! gcne•·ator
! Braking system Regenerative
:5 (regenerative energy braklng(el~ctrlc Regcnc~riiL j v~ LJ1·ak tng
~ process) dt scharge of (powt.!r source rcgcncrOJt tun)
~ 1---------------- _r_•__
•l_s_t_a_n_c•_>_ _ --------------------- ....
Input command voltage +10 VI>C (maximum speed) t•l OV (l,;.dt)
---- .. --- ·-. - ----- ----------
80 to 8,000 rpm 4S to 6.000 I l,S to 4SOO qnn
Speed control range

(Speed rat lo rpm
L 60 tn 6000 t pn1
;-----------·------- ::~:: ---'-~~~~trio ------ -C~,,~~~~-~~~~-:~·. ~:~ 1 ::~-

I.css thiJn 0.1":. of tht• m... xtmum :•p~t~d
Speed regulation
(l.uad ViJI"I;Irlnn 10 Ill 100'~,)
(*1) The :-ated 01Jtput is guaranteed at the rated input voltage (200V/220V/2301/AC). !f the input volt•p:e fluctuates,
it 1s possible that the rated output cannot be obtained even when such functions are within the allowable
fluctuation range.
(*2) The cycle time is 10 minutes, 50% ED: ON 5 min, OFF 5 min.
('*3) lf the power supply voltage is other than specified above, a transformer is needed.
(*4) For models 1 and 2, the rated output is in 15 minutes.
I - 3
3.2 Output/Torque. Characteristics
MODEL 1
Output Torque
kW kg·m
3 1.0
2.5
0.!!
2.2kW
N"'1S min, SO% ED
2
1/ I \
1S min, SO% ED operating zone 0.6
operating zone
I l.SkW I
"
1.5
I v \ I I
Continuous
I 0.4
'"' ""'I
'~
r-....
.......
v operating zone
1--r--
1'-r---
v
0.5
I 0.:! t--- Continuous
operating zone
0 1000 2000 3000 40~0 5000 tiOOO 7000 !WOO

I I I
0 1000 :?OOO :lOOO 40()0 5000 6000 7000 !!OOO.rpm
Motor speed Motor speed
MODEL2
Torque
kg·m
3
3.7kW
3
I 'is Ln. sJ%
ED
~-+l/-1----1-operating zone +---+--f""'""--i
~
\
I I
I I
II
i 2.2kW
2.SkW
'K'porntiog 'm
1S min, SO% ED
\ I . I
Contmuous
--.....1.8kW
\
----
operating zone
""'
"'~'-i'---
I~
Continuous · / ~ t:::::::
operating zone
0 1000 2000 :1000 4000 5000 nOOO 7000 !!Oil II rpm 0 1000 :!000 :lOilO ~000 5000 tiOOO 7000 11000 rpm
I - 4
MODEL3
Output Torque
kW kg·m
6,----.-----r-----r----~----r---~ 4.----~----~----,------r-----,----~
30 min, 50% ED
3.7kW operating zone
r----t--~1-+-----+-~
I
Continuous
f"l:+--+:---~
2
2 1--+-++--- I
I
__L_ Ll__ __ L_ ,.
- ----1
Continuous
I, operating zone ,
I :
I :
0 ______ j _________ l.______ !.____________ _;__I ---·
' I
_i r pn1
0
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 0 I 000 2000 :1000 4000 5000 nnno
MODEL&
Output Torque
kW kg·m
8.----,-----,-----..------., 5 .-----.,..-----~------7--·--r·--r-
4 t-----+ 3o ~i~.-so%_E_o ___r_

5.5kW · operating zone
3 t-----+---___.,.t-_..,,_...~:I --L---~-
I
- _j
I I
3.7kW
Continuous
operating zone !
0 ._____..._____~-----'------'-------'------' rpm 0 '-------'-----...l......----~-----1.....- ..._______. r p rn

0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 ~000 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000
MODELS
output Torque
kW kg·m
12,------.-------.-------,-------.---. !l .---------,---------,,- - - - - ·-- -, ... -
1 i
. 30 min, 50% ED
operating zone
i.5kW
Continuous 1
operating zone \
~ -- --r -1
--'--------'----UJ " "

I 000 :WOO :1000
Motor speed
4000 .jf,OU
Motor speed
___ Ii
:woo 10011 -1
_ _I
:,on
r Pill
I - 5
MODELS
Output Torque
kW kg·m
10
12
l I
-;
11 kW
30 min, 50% ED 8
30 min, 50% ED
operating zone
I
8
I
--7.5 kW
I
6 \\ oper1ating zone
I
~
Continuous
jl operating zone
4 \
-Continuo~ ~
4 ·-
f 1500
2
operating zone
......... ....... !'-..
r-- -
I I l
0 1000 2000 3000 1000 5000 oOOO rpm 0 1000 :woo :3000 .1()00 5000 6000 rpm
MODEL 12
Output Torque
kW kg·m
I o
r------+--""1. I
30 min, 50% ED
operating zone
I
6
4 --~
--r
Continuous
I operating zone
1
rpm OL-----~-------L------~------~~ rpm
4000 4500 0 1000 2000 ·1000 ·1500
Output MODEL 12 Torque
kW kg·m
20~--------~------.-----r--- 12;----,----,----,---,,----,--~
16 30 min, 50% ED
operating zone
12
11 kw
7.5kw
0 1000 2000 :woo II 0110 5000 oOOO rpm 0 I 000 2000 :1000 ·I 000 5000 6000 rpm
I - 6
MODEL 15
Output Torque
kW kg·m
zo~-----~-----,-------.-------,---. 15 .------,-------.------,---~-~
30 min, 50% ED
operating zone
10
5
Continuous
operating zone , .
I I • I
. , 1 I.
I I i !
0 L-----'------'-----'------'----' () ~----J..__ _ _ _ _L _______ l_ _____ l __ j
o 1000 2000 3000 4000 45oorPm o 1000 :woo 3000 4000 4500'"'"
Output Torque
kW kg·m
24~--~----~---.-----r----,----.
18.5 kW
Continuous
16 f-----+-+---+15 kW ,operating zone
15 kW
11 kW
1 45oo
operating zone
i
0 1000 2000 3000 1000 5000 6000rpm 0 1000 :.WOO 3000 lllllO 5000 \illllil rp111
MODEL 18
Output Torque
kW 1 5 kg ·m
Tr
25
30 min., 50% ED
operating zone 22kW
20
I
,/; lHSkW 30 min., 50% ED

Continuous operating zone .
10f-----t----".;c--P<:--~·· - --~~
operating zone
15
/;!/
I
' I I
10
I :
1
v.
I
5 -··- ---- I
0
0
I
I
1000
l
2000 3000 4000 4500rpm
0'---1
0
_....___~~---"-----"---.J
1000 :woo 3000 4000 1500 rpm
I - 7
MODEL22
Output Torque
kW kg·m
30~----~--~--~------~------~-- 20
30 min., 50% ED
operating zone 26kW
22kW 15
\
"\
30 min., 50% ED
Natingzone
10
tin~
5
Con
operating zone
~ t--
0 I
1000 2000 3000 4000 4500 rpm 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 4500rpm

MODEL30
Output Torque
kW kg·m
40r------.-------.~~~.-------.---, w.-----~---~---~---~-~
operating zone
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 1500rprn 0 ]()()() 2000 :~ooo ·1000 ·1500rpm
MODEL40 Motor speed Motor speed

Output Torque
kW kg·m
;;o ,----,----"T"-----r-----,.---. 50 ~---,----~---~---~---
10 r-----~------~------~----~~~
)() Continuous
operating zone
0 1000 2000 :1000 10tH) 1500rprn 0 1000 :!000 :moo

I - 8
4. CONFIGURATION
The AC spindle motor comprises the motor and accessories.
(1) AC spindle motor accessories (basic)
CD Key
GD Signal connector (housing, contactor)
The accessories are stored in the terminal box.

The specification of the connection cables between the motor and the AC
spindle servo unit are described in the APPENDIX 3. (The cables should
be prepared by the customer.)
I - 9
5. CONNECTION
MODEL 1, 2, 3, 6
Primary winding
- Connector connections
+ 5 \'
(j) Blue ~ Black <D Red
ov
PB PA + 5V
r------- PA
Pulse
!I
I
' - - - - - __ ....J
RA generator
® White ® Green ® Yellow
PB ~
RB RA ov
RB
ss ® ® (i)
OH2 ss OHl
0 Ollll
\'\ 0 0 II 2
Overheat
j signal
Connector specifications
-
AMP Universal MATE-N-LOK Connector
FMA
Motor side Cable side
Fan motor
Housing 350782-1 350720-1
FMB
Contact 350706-7 350689-6
The pulse generator and overheat signals are connected to the AMP connector.
The others employ screw terminals.
Screw sizes for terminal connections
Terminal name
Model U, V, w, G FMA, FMB, G
MODEL 1 M4 M4
MODEL 2 M4 M4
MODEL 3 M5 M4
MODEL 6 M5 M4
I - 10
MODEL 8, 12, 15
u
~ Primary winding
.,;;;. 0 G
- Connector connections
+5V
(j) Blue (J) Black <D Red
0 v
Pi\
PB PA + sv
Pulse
Ri\ generator
® White (S) Green @ Yellow
PU f..--
RB RA ov
RB
ss @ ® G>
ss
:
OH2 OHI
l
OHl
'~
Overheat
signal
01-12 Connector specifications
\
-
AMP Universal MATE-N-LOK Connector
FMA
Fan motor
Housing 350782-l 350720-l
FMB
Contact 350706-7 350689-6
~G
Terminal name
Model U, V, w, G FMA, FMB, G
MODEL 8 MS M4
MODEL 12 ! MS M4
MODEL 15 MS M4
I - 11
MODEL 18, 22, 30, 40
1
Primary winding
v
w
j
OG
' Connector connections
+SV
<J) Blue Q Black <D Red
ov
PB PA +SV
PA
Pulse
RA generator ® White G> Green @ Yellow
PB 1- RB RA ov
RB
® ® ~
ss
OH2 ss OHI
(\_
t
\
AMP Umversal MATE-N-LOK Connector
FMU} Motor side Cable side

F MV Fan mptor
Housing 350782-1 350720-1
FMW Contact 350706-7 350689-6
Model Terminal name
u, V, w, G FMU to FMW
18, 22 Jl---- M 8
----~------------------· .. -------- ·--
M4
30, 40 M4
I M 10
I - 12
6. CAUTIONS IN USE
(1) Terminal box

All electrical connections are made inside the terminal box. The
construction of the terminal box is as shown below.
0 0
Upper cover
Side plate ( 2)
------------ ·----
Lead cables through a round hole on side plate (1).
Cables can be led either rightward or leftward by exchanging side plate
(1) and (2) with each other.
(2) Allowable radial load

Use the motor output shaft at lower than the allowable radial load. If
a thrust load is applied by helical gears, etc., the shaft shifts toward
the thrust direction. Don't apply any thrust load, in principle.
Motor model Allowable radial load Output shaft bearing

-· - - --·--------
MODEL 1 40 kg 6206
------------ ---- --·--
MODEL 2 90 kg 6208
-- ·- ---·-----
MODEL 3 150 kg
6308
MODEL 6 200 kg
----- ----- -- ·--···-······- f----·--- ·-·· -·-··--
MODEL 8, 12, 15 300 kg 6312

t-------- ------- . --------------- --------- - --- -------. -·-- ·-- - - · - · - · - - - - -
MODEL 18, 22 450 kg 6313
------ ---------------------- ---------- f--·--·-··- ----------
MODEL 30, 40 500 kg 6314
Note) The above allowable radial load is a value when the load moment
is at the end of the output shaft.
I - 13
When using belt to transmit power, adjust the tension so that it does
not exceed the above alloable value. In case load is applied to the
thrust direction by helical gears, etc., the shaft will move to the
thrust direction. Therefore, do not generally apply thrust load.
(3) Mount the motor so that cutting oil or lubricating oil is not directly
splashed to the motor main body.
(4) Dynamic balance

The motor rotor is dynamically balanced with the balancing machine
under the mounting condition of a half key of 1/2 thick (see the outer
dimensions drawing) on the shaft.
Since the AC spindle motor is a high-speed rotating motor, its slight
unbalance, if any, causes noticeable vibrations. Particularly be
careful with dynamic balance of motor shaft gears and pulleys as well
as other high-speed rotation shaft.
For example, as shown in the following figure, unbalance is caused by the
space (weight M1, M2) in front of or behind key.
Therefore it is necessary to make a hole on the contrary side of the key
(~D1, depth H1 (radius R1) or ~D2, depth H2 (radius R2).
For operating high speed use the motor without key.
Puley Full key
\\
, \I
:\12
Half key
\ ~~ #
N
....
----;-------------_,-r----- -..-- ,..-
Motor shaft :'I
:::::
-r- :::> <,.___ -,.-
-r-
-
0
1
I
Ill
I 112 I
~I
0
* Motor balance condition
:r ( ()I/ 2 ) 2 Ill • p X H I ~' M I ·. r I p ; Density

:r ( D2/2) 2 112 "1' x H2 ~-,:\12 ·.. r 2
* Balance modification
I - 14
(5) An oil seal is mounted to .the flange type motor output shaft. Keep the
lubricating oil level lower than the oil seal lip·, so that lubricating
oil does not apply to the lip part directly.
Since the seal effect may be lost, if the lubricating oil is directly
applied to the lip part even in case of foreced lubrication, mount a
fringer as illustrated below.
.I
Fringer
.,I
0\i
"Sol
---:;1·
o•
..c!
<(I
Fringer mounting example
I - 15
II. AC SPINDLE SERVO UNIT (MODELS 1 - 40)
1. GENERAL
The present specifications describe the spindle servo units for AC

SPINDLE MOTOR MODELS 1, 2, 3, 6, 8, ·12, 15, 18, 22, 30 and 40 employed for
driving NC machine tools spindles.
2. FEATURES
(1) Power-saving (energy-saving) design

A three-phase input is directly rectified and converted into DC to
perform the velocity control of AC spindle motors through transistor
PWM inverter. The spindle servo unit is designed for energy-saving to
obtain high power with a small current owing to the unique power factor
improvement design in the input section.
(2) Low noise drive

The unique driving method (patent pending) reduces noises, even if the
AC spindle motor is operated at low speed.
(3) Smooth low-speed rotation

The unique driving method (patent pending) assures very smooth rotation
down to low speed.
(4) Electric spindle orientation control is applicable (option).

Since the spindle orientation can be done pure-electrically, the
mechanical section is simplified, and the machine spindle can be
composed with high reliability and largely reduced orientation time.
(5) No power transformer is needed for 200 to 230 VAC input.

Since no power transformer is required for input power voltage AC 200
to 230V, this spindle servo unit is very compact.
This unit can be used by connecting a separate power transformer, if
power voltage is other than 200 to 230 VAC.
(6) Regenerative braking is possible.

The unique driving method (patent pending) allows the motor to serve as
a generator during AC spindle motor deceleration so as to return energy
to the power source.
(7) Microprocessor is built in

_A microprocessor is built inside circuits for stable velocity control
fo the AC spindle motor.
(8) External radiation is also possible

There are also models in which a part of the cooling fin of the servo
unit is mounted externally, so cooling from the outside is also
possible. In this way, the main radiation can be cooled with the open
air, and the electric circuit in the magnetics cabinet can be
completely closed resulting in higher reliability.
II - 1
3. CONFIGURATION
3.1 Configuration
The FANUC AC spindle servo unit consists of the following units and
parts.
(1) Spindle control unit (basic)

(2) Resistor unit (basic only for MODEL I, 2 and small type MODEL 3)
(3) Fuses (for spare) (basic)
(4) Connectors (for connections) (basic)
(5) D/A converter (option)
(6) Power transformer (option)
(7) Spindle orientation control circuit (option)
(8) Unit cover (option for MODEL 3, 6, 8, 12 only)
(9) Fan unit (option for MODEL 30, 40 only)
(10) Unit adaptor (option for MODEL 8, 12 only)
(11) Velocity gain selector circuit (option)
AC Spindle Servo Unit
(Basic)
r----, r--------, Connectors
I 1 I : Spindle
l
l
l___ I
: i
Magnetic sequence
control
1---- control
unit Fuses
1
I 1 I I
I NC L--------...J
I I Resistor unit
1 I AC spindle motor
I I
I I (Option)
IL _ _ _ _ ...JI
I D/A converter Unit cover
Spindle oriention Fan unit

control circuit
Velocity gain Unit adaptor

selector circuit
---------11
3-phasc power supply .
No fuse breaker f
I
I
I Power transformer
L-------- (option)
II - 2 .
w
i\l
-1
Basic Optior:t <
i
"'0
Spindle control unit Velocity ....
Spindle Spindle gain c
:I
servo Internal External orienta- change ~
unit ventilla- radiation Resistor Connec- DA tion control Power Unit Fan Unit Dl
:I
model tion type type ~nit tors Fuses Converter circuit circuit transformer cover unit adaptor 0.
-1
J
MODEL 1 CD
:;·
MODEL 2 ~
3
- 0 0 - C"
:r
Small
type 5 types
ac:r
:I
MODEL 3 -
H
"'
H
MODEL 3
w
MODEL 6
0
MODEL 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 type - 0
MODEL 12 - 2 type 2 types 8 types 1 type
MODEL 15
MODEL 18
MODEL 22 - -
MODEL 30
- 0
MODEL 40 1 type
I
o : Provided, or applicable
Not provided, or not applicable
4. SPECIFICATIONS
4.1 Spindle Control Unit
4.1.1 Specifications
For main specification of the spindle control unit, refer to section I-3.
4.1.2 Functions
The spindle control unit rectifies three-phase AC input, and converts

it into DC so as to perform the velocity control of the AC spindle motor
through transistor PWM inverter.
The spindle control unit is provided with a protective and fault
detection function as shown in (1) for the purpose of protecting machine, AC
spindle motor, and AC spindle servo unit, if a trouble occurred. It also
provides an auxiliary function as shown in (2) for monitoring the operating
conditions of the spindle.
(1) Protective and fault detection functions
Item Description Display
Motor overheat An alarm is issued, i f the Light-emitting diode

detection internal temperature of AC (LED) display
spindle motor abnormally
increases.
Excessive velocity An alarm is issued, i f the AC Light-emitting diode

deviation spindle motor speed is largely (LED) display
I detection deviated from the commanded
speed due to an overload, etc.
t---
i :·i:,ir. ,:ircuit input If the main circuit input Light-emitting diode
Ifuse current is excessively high due
to a ground fault, etc., the
(LED) display
fuse is blown out to issue an

I
I
alarm
DC link fuse If the DC link current is Light-emitting diode

excessively high due to a fault (LED) disply
of the power circuit, etc., the
alarm.
Control power fuse If the control power current Light-emitting diode

becomes excessive due to a fault (LED) disply
inside the control PCB, etc.,
the alarm fuse is blown out to
issue an alarm.
II - 4
Overspeed If the AC spindle motor exceeds Light-emitting diode

detection 100 to ll5% of the rated maximum (LED) display
speed, an alarm is issued.
Overvoltage If the AC input power circuit Light-emitting diode

detection voltage exceeds the rated (LED) display
voltage range, an alarm is
issued.
Main circuit If the temperature at radiation Light-emitting diode

overload detection of power circuit anbormally (LED) display
increases, an alarm is issued.
Undervoltage I f the control power voltage Light-emitting diode

detection abnormally lowers, an alarm is (LED) display
issued.
DC link If the DC link voltage Light-emitting diode

overvoltage abnormally increases, an alarm (LED) display
is issued.
Abnormal current If an abnormal large current Light-emitting diode

detection flows to the main circuit, an (LED) display
alarm is issued.
Abnormal An alarm is issued, i f Light-emitting diode

Arithmetic circuit microprocessor or its peripheral (LED) display
detection parts of arithmetic circuit is
abnormal.
Abnormal ROM An alarm is issued, i f ROM is in Light-emitting diode

detection trouble. (LED) display
Detection of An alarm is issued when Light-emitting diode

overtime of the regenerative current flows for (LED) display
regenerative more than the allowable
current operation time, because of
excessive additional inertia,
abnormality in regenerative
power circuit, or abnormality in
the connection (for MODEL 1' 2
and small type MODEL 3)
Detection of An alarm is issued with Light-emitting diode

abnormality in the abnormality of the option (LED) disply
option circuit circuit (spindle selection
circuit) and of the
connection with the option
circuit.
II - 5
(2) Auxiliary functions
The AC spindle servo unit provides the following auxiliary functions.
Item No. Auxiliary functions ! Description

1 - - - - - l - - - - - - - - - - - - - j - - - ----~------ ···--------
1 I Loadmeter output 1 The 10-DVC meter (one-sided deflection
type) is connectable.
----· - ---+---------------------+---------------------------------------------;
2 Speedmeter output The 10-DVC meter (one-sided deflection
1-----------+------------ ---- -----~---------------------------------------1
3 Speed zero signal Stop of spindle motor can be confirmed.
output
4 1
Speed arrival . This signal indicates that the spindle
1 signal output 1 motor has reached the commanded speed.
I
5 Override I Override to the command speed (auto) is

1
possible.
1------------+---------------------r---------------------------------~
6 Speed detection The clutch changeable speed and gear
signal output changeable speed can be confirmed to be
lower than a certain speed.
1------------+------------------·-
7 Torque limit The output torque of the spindle motor
can be temporarily made small and
rotated.
8 Soft In spindle motors MODEL 30, 40 of larger

start/stop output, the speed inclination of
(For MODEL 30, 40) acceleration/deceleration can be made
more gentle to apply to special
applications of the machine.
II - 6
4.2 Resistor Unit
This unit is provided to the models 1, 2 and small type model 3, for
discharging of the regenerative energy when decelerating the motor.
4.3 Connectors
The following specifications table specifies the counter-connectors for

the connectors mounted on control PCB of basic of the AC spindle servo unit.
The signal connectors of the motor side are attached to the motor.
1) Specifications
Use Name Specifications Qty FANUC's specifications Remarks
For CN1 Connector MR -SOLFH 1 A63L-0001-0134/01 Soldered

with cover
(50 pin) MRP-50F01 1 A63L-0001-0134/21 Crimp style
For CN2 Connector MR -20LFH 1 A63L-0001-0134/02 Soldered

with cover
(20 pin) MRP-20LF01 1 A63L-0001-0134/22 Crimp style
For CN3 I Connector MR-20LMH 1 A63L-0001-0134/12 Soldered

with cover
j (20 pin) MRP-20LM01 1 A63L-0001-0134/32 Crimp style
2) Structure
Soldered/ crimp-style
MR-SOFH (MRP-SOFOl) terminal MR-SOL (MR-SOL)
MR-20FH (MRP-20FO 1) MR-20L (MR-20L)
MR-20MH (MRP-20MO 1) Body Cover MR-20L (MR-20L)
Connector with cover
MR-SOLFH (MRP-SOLFOl)
MR-20LFH (MRP-20LF01)
MR-20LMH (MRP-20LM01)
Specifications shown in parentheses are for crimp-style terminal.
3) Pin array of terminal

Refer to Appendix 1 for the pin array of terminal.
4) Outer diameter of cable
Connector specifications Outer diameter of cable
MR-50LFH Max. ~16 mm
MR-20LFH Max. ~10 mm

MR-20LMH
II - 7
~
~
Following table shows the spare fuses .,
c
m
~
HODEL 1/? !
Small type HODEL 3, 6 HODEL 8 HODEL 12 HODEL 15 HODEL 18 HODEL 22 IIODEL 30 MODEL 40
n
HODEL 1, 2 I
Name r A068·6052-K010 !A068·6044·;033 A06B·6044·K025 A068·6044·K026 A068·6044-K014 A068·6044·K015 A068·6044·K016 A068·6044·K028 A068·6044·KO
-1----
Fuse (50A) A60L·0001·014 7 ( 25FII50) 3
Fuse (7SA) A60L·0001·0127 /25FH75 1
Fuse (100A) A60L·0001·0145 (25SH100) 4 3 i
==[-.~·-s=
---- --------- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ----- ~- --
Fuse (140A) A60L-0001·0149 (25SH140) I t 4 4
- - ---------
:. 4
Fuse (lSOA) A601.·0001·0163 (25SH150)
H I ---
H Fuse (225A) A60L-0001·0183/225A
----- f---·
00 Fuse (260A) A60L·0001·0183/260A ! 4

------ -------- ---- ----.-~-· ------
Fuse (20A) A60L·0001·0197/PC1F-20 2
Fuse (lOA) A60L·0001·0197/PC1F· 30 2 2 2

-- ------------- - - t---
Fuse (40A) A60L·0001·0197/PC2F·40 2
-- - - - - - f---·
Fuse (50A) A60L·0001·0197/PC2F·50 2
1---
Alarm fuse (J, 2AS) A60L·0001·0075/3. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
-
Alarm fuse ( 3, 2A) A60L·0001·0046/3. 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Fuse (SA) A60L·0001·0031/5A 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 5 5

----·· ~-----
Fuse (0.3A) A60L-0001·0175/0, 3A 2 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Surge absorber A50L·2001·0062/441·12 4 1 1 I
Surge absorber A50L· 2001·0155/200431 1 4 4 4 4 4 3 3

--- ------ -- I
4.5 DA Converter (Option)
4.5.1 DA Converter (BCD)
(1) This converter converts an 8-bit code signal into an analog voltage
when the speed command is input by the BCD code (S 2-digit).
~
0
>
011
....r:0
<
ov I£__ _ _ _ _ _ _ ~,_ __
00. ································· 99
Code signal (BCD)
The relation between BCD codes and speed is as shown below.
Motor speed Motor speed Motor speed

BCD code Analog output
(V)
(Max. 8000 (Max. 6000 (Max. 4500
rpm spec.) rpm spec.) rpm spec.)
00 0.0 0 0 0
01 0.101 80.8 60.6 45.5
02 0.202 161.6 121.2 90.9
... ... .
.. ... ...
98 9.899 7919.2 5939.4 4454.5
99 10.0 8000 6000 4500
(2) The input terminals correspond to the BCD codes as shown below.
Input
terminal . BCD
ROl 01
R02
R03
R04
02
04
08
) BCD unit digit (4 bitss)
R05 10
R06 20
R07
ROB
40
80
) BCD tenth digit (4 bits)
* Input terminals R09 to Rl2 are irrespective of BCD codes.
II - 9
4.5.2 DA Converter (Binary)
(1) This converter converts a 12-bit code signal into an analog voltage
when the velocity command is input as a binary code .
.,
-
"""'
0
>
""0
o;
c
<
4095
Code signal (binary)
The relation between the binary code signals and speed is as shown
below.
Motor speed Motor speed Motor speed

Binary n1.1mber Analog output (Max. 8000 (Max. 6000 (Max. 4500
rpm spec.) rpm spec.) rpm spec.)
000000000000 0.0 0 0 0
000000000001 0.002 1.95 1.47 1.09
000000000010 0.004 3.90 2.93 2.18
... ... .. . ..
. .. .
111111111110 9.99 7998.0 5998.5 4498.9
llll1llllll1 10.0 8000 6000 4500
4.6 Spindle Orientation Circuit (Option)
Refer to section VII.
4.7 Spindle Speed Gain Switch Circuit (Option)
Refer to section IX.
II - 10
4.8 Power Transformer {Option)
The FANUC AC spindle motor can be operated at 200 - 230 VAC input without
any transformer. ·
If AC input is other than specified above a power transformer is needed.
For preparing a power transformer by users, following specifications must be
satisfied.
(1) Specifications
~ m
Rated 30 min.
1
4
2
7
3
9
6
12
8
17
12
22
15
26
18
32
22
37
30
54
40
63
Capacity
(kVA) Continuous 3 4 7 9 12 17 22 26 31 44 54
Secondary current
12 21 26 35 48 62 74 90 110 156 182
(30 min.) (A)
Secondary tap
200V
output voltage
Secondary voltage
5%
regulation
Secondary voltage
deviation -+3%
(2) Power transformer specifications (option)
The following kinds of power transformers are available.
Select them according to the power capacity of AC spindle servo unit
within the following rated capacity per 30 minutes.
Il-11
~ Models
1 2 6 12 22
Items-~
3 8 15 18 30 40
Order A06B-6052-J001 A06B-6044-J006 A06B-6044-J007 A06B-6044-J010 A06B-6044-J015

specifications
Remarked A80L-0001-0496 A80L-0001-0313 A80L-0001-0314 A80L-0001-0352 A80L-0001-0452
specification
Con- 7 kVA 15 kVA 26 kVA 40 kVA
Rated tinuous 63 kVA
capacity 30 min. 10 kVA 20 kVA 30 kVA 45 kVA 75 kVA
Rated primary 380/415/460V +10%, -15%, 50/60 Hz .=1 Hz, 30
voltage
Rated primary 11A (at 380V) 23A (at 380V) 40A (at 380V) 61A (at 380V) 98A (at 380V)
current lOA (at 415V) 21A (at 415V) 36A (at 415V) 56A (at 415V) 90A (15 415V)
(continuous) 9A (at 460V) 19A (at 460V) 33A (at 460V) 51A (at 460V) SlA (at 460V)
Rated secondary 200V 200V 200V 200V 200V
voltage (See Fig. 1)
Rated secondary
current 20A 43A 74A 115A 185A
(continuous)
Seconary voltage 5%
regulation
Seconary voltage
deviation -+3%
Connection Star connection
Insulation Class H (Maximum allowable temperature 180°C)
Ambient 0 to 45°C
temperature
Allowable tern-
perature-rise l35°C
of transformer
Humidity Max. 95% RH
i Type Dry type, self-cooled
i
I Dielectric 2000 VAC in, 1 min.
i strength
! Vleight i
Max. 61 kg Max. 115 kg Max. 165 kg Max. 260 kg· Max. 375 kg
: Outer dimen- Fig. 1.7(a), (b) Fig. 1.7(c),(d) Fig. 1. 7 (e) , (f) Fig.1. 7(g), (h) Fig .1. 7 ( i) , ( j )
sions in Appendix in Appendix in Appendix in Appendix in Appendix
460V 230V R4
R3 SHIELD
415V 200V
R2
380V I u
Rl
PRI.
I
I SEC. 0 (Neutral
~! K~
point)
Tl
T2
v
T3 84
Connection
diagram Sl
82 w
S3 T4
(Primary) (Secondary)
0 0
II - 12
(3) Secondary output voltage
Voltage fluctuation width (about I OV) when

load is fluctuated over a range of 0 to I 00%
hy 380V AC tap.
460VAC tap
-- -
200VAC
+10%
-15%
~~z::..___ -
220VAC
+10%
-15%
160
u u u u u u
.....,
<
>
Q
<
>
... ...
C>
C>
<
>
~
<
>
......
C>
<
>
...
0
>0 .....
<
>
0
320 360 400 440 480 520 560
AC input voltage ( v)
(4) Connection method of transformer

Connect the transformer to the taps given in the following table
according to AC input voltages.
Connect and adjust the selector switch for the control power
transformer inside the spindle servo unit according to the following
table.
Control power transformer
Nominal AC input voltage Taps employed
voltage selector switch
+10%
380V R1, S1, T1, G (380V) (200V) side
-15%
400V +10% R1, S1, T1, G (380V) (220V) side (upper)

-15%
+10%
415V R2, S2, T2, G (415V) (200V) side
-15%
+10%
440V R2, S2, T2, G (415V) (220V) side (upper)
-15%
f---
+10% R3, S3, T3, G (460V) (200V) side
460V
-15%
480V +10% R3, S3, T3, G (460V) (220V) side (upper)

-15%
(5) Cautions on use of transformer
(a) When mounting the transformer in a locker, separate it so as not

to give a thermal effect to other unit.
(b) When mounting the transformer outside, be careful not to expose it
to cutting chips and cutting oil slash directly.
(c) If the transformer may fall, fix it with bolts, etc.
II - 13
4.9 Unit Cover (Option)
A cover may become necessary according to the mounting of the spindle

servo unit for AC SPINDLE SERVO MOTOR MODEL 3, 6, 8, and 12 on the machine
magnetics cabinet. The cover is used when it is necessary to protect the PCB.
4.10 Fan Unit
Used for cooling of the radiation part of the spindle servo unit for AC
SPINDLE SERVO MOTOR MODEL 30, 40. The fan unit is directly mounted on the
back of the unit.
(Specification of the fan motor)
Max. Max.
! Max. statistic Noise .allowable
Voltage Frequency Input Rotation ventillation pressure phone temperature
v Hz w rpm m/min mm H2o (A) oc
50 43 2750 6.5 15 49
200 --------- ----- -------- ------------ --------- ----- 70
60 40 3200 7.5 16 53
FANUC's specification No. Fan motor A90L-0071-0049/A

Finger guard A97L-0071-0001
4.11 Unit Adaptor (Option)
Use this unit adaptor to mount the servo unit for models 8 and 12 on the
machine by a mount pitch of 200x830mm. Using this mount board, the depth of
the motor becomes 12mm higher than the standard unit.
(a) (b)
When mounted When mounted
on the top at the bottom
'Ill :117
- :.:oo
~+=±'"
v--
:::' .;. H•
I
I
I _, -·-
"'
~
'
0
v0
I
~~ .,""' ~ACSPINDLE
SERVO UNIT
'
I
-~ ADAPTOR
/
~ AC SPINDLE
: (A06B-6044-K031) SERVO UNIT
L------------
.J'L
' $t: j
10
-
Fig. 4.11 Example of mounting
II - 14
5. INSTALLATION
5.1 Environmental Requirement
Install the AC spindle servo unit in a place satisfying the following

environmental conditions.
5.1.1 Ambient temperature
Ambient temperature around unit 0° to 55°C

Ambient temperature in the cabinet: 0° to 45°C
5.1.2 Humidity
Normally: 95% RH or less; no dew
5.1.3 Vibration
When operating: O.SG or less
5.1.4 Atmosphere
Keep corrosive or conductive mist and dew away from the electric
circuits.
5.2 Input Power Supply and Grounding
1) Input power supply
- Nominal rated voltage 200/220/230VAC
- Allowable voltage fluctuation width: -15% to +10%
- Power supply frequency 50/60Hz
- Allowable fluctuation width +1Hz
- Power supply impedance According to load (1.2 times

of the 30 min. rate)
Voltage fluctuation is 7% or
less.
- Power supply·unbalance The deviation width of each

phase in the 3-phase power
supply is 15% or less of the
rated voltage.
- Mount the circuit breaker having enough capacity at the input side
ei~her of the AC spindle servo unit or machine tool.
- Power factor of input power is 0.9 or more when driving AC spindle

motor. Capacitor for leading power factor is not required at the
input side of AC spindle servo unit.
- Alarm No. 4 may occur at open-phase or temporary power failure.
II - 15
- Leakage current when driving AC spindle motor
Since the drive circuit employs the transistor-drive-pulse-width
modulation-control, when the component of high-frequency leakage
current flows to the ea~th through the spindle motor or connection
cable, 50/60 Hz component of leakage current is less than
sensitive current (15 rnA) of high-sensitive/high-speed leakage
breaker for the cable of 50 m or less.
- Radio noise
Since the drive circuit employs the pulse-width-modulation
control, a radio near AC spindle motor or drive circuit may be
affected by noise due to high-frequency current when switching the
transistor. The AM radio is interfered but TV or FM radio is not.
To avoid a noise, mount the unit or install the machine tool using
following notices.
1) Mount the AC spindle seryo unit in the metal cabinet.
2) Cable connecting between the servo unit and AC spindle motor
is routed through the metal duct and ground the duct.
3) Connect the G terminals (ground) between the servo unit and AC
spindle motor as specified.
II - 16
2) Grounding
The following ground lines must always be connected.
o Input power supply grounding line
o Motor grounding line
(Note I) The rotation energy of the AC spindle motor is regenerated to the

power source by using a thyristor inverter during the deceleration
time. Accordingly, the following restriction and effect may be
produced, if the power line impedance is high.
Particularly be careful with this caution when a power transformer
having comparatively small capacity is used or a long power cable is
used.
The power impedance which may be almost free of the restriction in
item (1) is within about 7% when the load is the maximum value of
overload capacity (120% load of 30 min. rated value) (*)
(1) If the power line impedance (including the impedance of

transformer) is high, it may be necessary to reduce the
regenerative current and increase the deceleration time. (The
AC spindle servo unit must be readjusted.)
(2) It is possible that the power voltage waveform is disturbed by

a commutation change of the thyristor inverter, and such a
waveform distortion affects other units.
(*) Example of method of confirming the power impedance
ToAC
power source
I ------------OR
-----~::oo()S AC
spindle
Uo-----------~
V o---------i
----+---=OT servo unit W(')-------""""'
----~~--+-OG Go-----------~'
AC voltmeter
Eo -E 1 x 100(%)<7(%)
Eo
Voltage during motor stop

Voltage during motor acceleration or just before the motor speed begins
reducing with heavy load applied.
II - 17
5.3 Caloric Value of Units
Table 5.3 Caloric value of each unit
Small
Motor MODEL 1 2 6 8 12 15 18 22 30 40
type
3
Caloric value
at continuous 280 310 340 420 500 660 840 1050 1250 2000 2400
rated output
For MODEL 12, when the ambient temperature is high, continuous operating
time at 30 min. rated value output ~s restricted as follows.
30
..,
:a
till
20
~
..,..."'
Q,
0
"'0
::s
::s
.5
c0
u
Ambient temperature (°C)
Fig. 5.3 Continuous operating time·due to heat limitation of the servo unit
5.4 M~intenance Area
Refer to Appendix 6.
5.5 Cable Routing
II - 18
5.6 Notes on Mounting
5.6.1 Spindle servo unit
( 1) The cooling fan motor for the external radiation type unit is not
attached. Cool the radiator of the servo unit referring to Appendix 5.
(2) For the external radiation type, more than 70% of the entire heat
generation of the unit can be radiated by cooling properly •.
(3) Fan motor and necessary wind speed and air flow for the external
radiation type.
MODEL MODEL MODEL MODEL MODEL MODEL

1, 2 3, 6 8, 12 15 18, 22 30, 40
Small
type 3
Necessary 2m/sec 3m/sec 3m/sec 3m/sec 3m/sec -

wind speed or more or more or more or more or more
Output - - - - - 4.5 m3 /min

air flow or more
Fan motor Tobishi Tobishi Tobishi

N4556 117956 7556X
equivalent equivalent 2 sets
equivalent
(4) Notes on mounting unit MODEL 30, 40
o Unit structure
To avoid the rise of ambient temperature in the cabinet and the unit
body caused by heat generation at load, the structure is designed so
that the head sink and the regenerative auxiliary resistance are
parted.
As shown in the outer drawing, there is an air inlet and an air
outlet at the back of the unit. Use a vertical angle to install the
unit with consideration on the ventilation route, and screw the
bolts on this angle.
0 Necessary air and ventilation route.

The air supplied from the air inlet must be 4. 5 m3 /min or more. A
structure in which cooling wind is supplied from the air inlet is
recommended for ventilation, to prolong the life of the fan motor.
The option fan unit can also be directly mounted on the air inlet as
shown in Fig. 1.3 (k), (1) of Appendix. In that case, the rear
distance of fan unit must be 50 mm or more.
When designing the ventilation route, use the M4 tap holes (6 each)
around the air inlet and air outlet. For specifications on fan motor,
see next item.
II - 19
o Notes on ventilation
If the unit is used for a long time under bad environments, current
leak caused by deterioration of the radiation capacity or
deterioration of insulation of the reistance. To avoid this to
happen, the ventilation must always be done via the air filter.
The area of the air filter must be decided so that necessary
ventilation is maintained.
Air filter VILEDON PS/600
Fan motor (JAPAN VILENE CO. LTD.)
2 pes of TOBISHI KOSAN Type 7556X used
o Notes on air outlet

Take care so that machine oil does not flow into the air outlet, or
metal chips do not enter the air outlet.
o Installation of the unit

When installing the unit to the cabinet, be careful of the following,
because the unit is fairly heavy.
(1) The unit is designed to hang with the eye bolts at the top.
Therefore, installation must be able to be done with this
position.
(2) If it is difficult to install the unit by hanging it with the eye
bolts, use the M8 auxiliary taps at the bottom of the unit side
to fix the bottom temporarily on a fork lift, move the unit, and
install it in place.
(3) It is recommended to set a positioning guide at the bottom of the
unit in any of the above cases.
o Sealing
If it is necessary to ·completely colse the unit body and the back,
apply the following tape around the outer ring of the back.
NITTO EPTO SEALLER (NITTO DENKO)
IOmm(W) x Smm(W) x 4m(L)
5.6.2 Resistor unit
(1) Compulsorily, cool the resistor unit with ventilation of 2m/sec or more,
by fan motors, etc.
(2) 4 thermostat (120°C) is on the surface of the resistor unit. Use this
thermostat to detect if the cooling by fan motor, etc. is not done
normally, or if the frequency of use is extremely high.
(3) Use the thermostat signal for sequences to stop the program at the end of
the block along with an alarm when the contact is OFF (open), by
connecting the signal to the magnetic circuit.
II - 20
6. CONNECTIONS
6.1 Total Connection Diagram
6.2 Detailed Connection Diagram
6.2.1 Connection diagram of the p()wer supply
AC Spindle
r--- ------, I 200V /230V AC servo unit
N o·fuse I 50/60HZ
h reaker
I!
T
I
I
l s
I
I
I I
I
I l T
I I
I _ _ _ _ _ _.JI
L.---
4-core ca btire cable

or single line
(for model 30/40)
Crimp terminal size

R.S.T. G
Unit type Adaptable line terminal terminal
MODEL 1 2 mm 2 or more
2
MODEL 2 3.5 mm or more M4 M4
Small type MODEL 3 2 or more

5.5 mm
MODEL 3
M6 M5
2
MODEL 6 8 mm or more
MODEL 8 14 mm 2 or more M8 M6
MODEL 12
MODEL 15 22 mm 2 or more (Heat resistive) 'M 8 M6
2
MODEL 18 30 mm or more (Heat resistive) M8 M6
2
MODEL 22 38 mm or more (Heat resistive) M8 M6
2
MODEL 30 R.S.T. 38 mm single line M10 MlO
(Heat 2resistive)
G 22 mm single line
(Heat resistive)
2
MODEL 40 R.S.T. 50 mm single line M10 MlO
(Heat 2resistive)
22 mm single line
(Heat resistive)
II - 21
6.2.2 Connection diagram of the AC spindle servo unit and the magnetics cabinet
Magnetics cabinet AC spindle servo unit

(Spindle control input signal]
('N I
1·~~1'1 (H)
Emer~ency stop when
Emergency stop signal
contact is open
Operation ready when 1-:~1'2 (-1!!)
contact is closed 0\'
MIWYI (7)
Operation ready when

contact is closed
MIWY2 (lll
~Fil ( ·15) Forward rotation

Forward rotation when command signal
contact is closed
Reverse rotation when SIIV (46) Reverse rotation
contact is closed command signal
It stopps when both SFR and
SRV contacts are closed at the ()~ ( 14)
same time For binary ov
For BCD
r------., HOI (33)
I
I Velocity command code
Give a velocity command I signal input
voltage corresponding to I
the code signal inpu I H02 (34)
contact closed. The
optional DA converter is
required. R03 (35)
R04 (36)
lieD Binary
R01
R05 (37)
R02 2 2
R03 4 4
R06 (38)
R04 8 8
1105 10 16
1106 20 3'' R07 (39)
1107 40 64
HOii HO 12H !lOll (40)
I
I
Ill!! 256 L
RIO 512 R09 (41)
R11 1024
R12 2048 RIO (42)
!l!l 40!15
R 11 (43)
10\' 10V
Rl2 (44)
OR ( 13)
ov
Fig. 6.2.2 (a) Connection diagram of the AC spindle servo unit and the magnetics cabinet
II - 22
Cl\1
(30)
DAI
DA2 ( :~ 1 )
Analog velocity command
voltage is given .
E (32) OV Velocity command

analog voltage input
ov
+ISV
+lSV power supply
•-+J 5 v o.-.:..:(:~'·9:...;):__,
_ OVRl (27)
1.8 k
VR I Setting I
I
Override is continuously
I szl
1 0VR2 (28)
done with the variable
resistor.
R
Spindle rotation
oV speed override 0V
Fig. 6.2.2 (b) Connection diagram of the AC spindle servo unit and the magnetics cabinet
II - 23
Magnetics cabinet
Can be used as ready sijlnals

for forward/reverse
Can be used at complete

signal for stop command.
Can be used as detection

at gear shift.
Can be used as complete

signal for torque limit
command.
Can he used as orientation

command complete signal
Can be used as alarm ALMI (II)

signal
Alarm sijlnal Contact
ALM2 ( 12) closes when under alum.
(Contact B)
f'N3
ALI (!l)
Can be used to display the /. [ Alarm descriptions oode

, signal
descriptions of alarm on AL2 (!I)
the CRT. etc.
~ [There are alarms No.I to 15.
Al,4 (10)
AL!l (11) ~r
('OM ( 13)
~[
CNI TB
LMl (4!1) :l':.:i.l::V'"LM Load meter indicate
voltage
TB
SMl (50) :l':.:i.l::ZfSM Speed meter indicate
voltage
TB
OM (18) :l':.:i.l::V'"OM
OV
Fig. 6.2.2 (c) Connection diagram of the AC spindle servo unit and the magnetics cabinet
II - 24
6.2.3 Connection diagram of the AC spindle servo unit and the AC spindle motor
1) MODEL 1 to 15
Spindle servo unit AC Spindle motor
I CN21
Overheat signal OHl
RV OHI
13!
OH2
OH2
-=- ov 121
+5V " +5V

+SV Power Supply
U3l I
I
I
I
: I
ov : j ov
Ill r'-'
I ,...
I PA
PA I
U4l I 'I
I
'
I ' I RA
.......
I
RA
U5l
Velocity feedback I PB
signal PB I I "
U6l o I
I ; j
U7) SSJJ _____
RB I RB
ss
~ 00
[bij L..---"'
Pulse Thermostat
u z ~nerator
AC spindle motor u u
v
Primary coil v \'X
Excitation voltage w w v
'\_y
G w
G G Single phase
G C><)
200VAC
r--
r----------------
1 Connect from the no-fuse breaker
---.,
I
AC Spindle
motor
1 in case of model 1, 2 and small I
I type model 3 200 y AC I FMA
I Power for fan motor FMA
I I
I I FMB
I FMB
I _ _ _jI
L---------------
II - 25
2) MODEL 18, 22, 30, 40
Spindle servo unit AC Spindle motor
ICN21
OHI
Overheat signal RV OHI
(31
OH2
0112
=- ov (2)
+SV ,.., +SV

+SV power supply
U3) I
I
I
0\' ; ov
(1) r...,
I
I r- PA
PA
r U4l I : I
I
I ''
I
I
' RA
RA
US) f.--lor
Velocity feedback
signal I /"\ PB
PB I
US) I' I
I
:'
SSJJ _____ RB
I
i I
i RB
Q7)
ss
~ 00)
r, ,
I ~
L:='.J
Pulse
'---""'""'
Thermostat
AC Spindle motor
~ z generator
lJ
u
I
!
Primary coil v "\X
I
v
i
Excitation voltage w
"yw
G. G 3-phase
G C><)
200VAC
fan motor
AC Spindle
~ motor
AC 200V FMU
Power for fan motor FMU
FMV
FMV
.--- -------- _... -------------------- ----------,
! FMW '
FMW
'-' -- --------------------------------- ---------..1'
Note) In MODEL 18 and 22, FMW marked with dotted lines is not used in case
of single phase.
II - 26
Servo unit U, V, W, G terminal FMA, B/FMU, V, W
Crimp
terminal size Approved Crimp
Unit type Approved wire wire terminal
U, V, W G size
terminal terminal
MODEL 1 2 mm2 or more
MODEL 2 3.5 mm2 or more M4 M4
Small type
HODEL 3 5.5 mm 2 or more
MODEL 3
M5 M5
MODEL 6 8 mm2 or more
2 mm 2 M4
MODEL 8
MODEL 12 14 mm2 or more M5 M6
22 mm 2 or more
MODEL 15 M8 M6
(Heat-proof type)
MODEL 18 30 uun 2 or more

M8 M6
(Heat~proof type)
MODEL 22 38 uun 2 or more

M8 M6
(Heat-proof type)
U, V, W: 38 mm 2 Single
MODEL 30 line (Heat-proof type)
G: 22 mm 2 Single line
MlO MlO
(Heat-proof type)
U, V, W: SO mm 2 Single
line (Heat-proof type)
MODEL 40 MlO M10
G 22: mm 2 Single line
(Heat-proof type)
II - 27
6.2.4 Connection diagram of the AC spindle servo unit and their resistance unit
(For MODEL 1, 2 and small type MODEL 3)
AC Spindle servo unit Resistor unit
'1'3
T2
3.5mm 2 (I)
(I)
Resistor
lkW
-t
oo; 15!2
(2)
(2)
TS.S-4 '1'5.5--1
Magnetic cabinet
Til
0.75mm 2 (A)
Detects abnormal Thermostat
temperature of the
resistor unit. (B)
I Til I 120°C
Tl-3 Normal close

Open when it is
l20°C:t6°C
6.2.5 Connection diagram of the AC spindle servo unit and the fan unit
AC Spindle servo unit Fan unit or Fan motor
T2
FMA
Tl-4 Tl-4
II - 28
7. DESCRIPTIONS ON INTERFACE SIGNAL
7.1 Interface Signal Standards
For signals to be transferred between the servo unit and the exterior,
take the following input/output signal rating into due consideration.
(1) Contact input signal A

This is inputted from the exterior to the servo unit.
(a) External contact capacity required: Higher than 30V, higher than
16mA.
(b) The following figure indicates the delay time of the receiver
output signal to the contact input signal.
1--- More than 30m sec ----1

I Closed I
Contact input
signal
Receiver output
signal
5-20m sec 5-20m sec
Accordingly, the servo unit receives signals after 5 to 20ms delay

when the contact input signal was turned on and off.
(c) For the receiver circuit on the · servo unit side, refer to the
following figure when using a no-contact input, etc.
+24V +24V
External contact Receiver output

r---:--:---, signal
Servo unit
Signification levels in case of no-contact (at input terminal

voltage)
Low level logic "O" Lower than 2V
High level logic "1" Higher than 20V
II - 29
(2) Contact output signal A1 (For MODEL 3 to 22)
This is outputted from the servo unit to the exterior.
(a) The servo unit employs a reed relay. The contact rating is lower
than 50V or lower than 500mA at 5VA or lower. Use it at 24V, 200mA
or lower, or 48V, lOOmA or lower, accordingly. The chattering time
of the contact is shorter than 1 msec.
(b) If an external relay or another inductive load is connected, insert
a surge absorber in the vicinity of the relay without fail. If a
capacitive load is connected, insert a current limiting resistor in
series, and set the power to be lower than 5VA including an
instantaneous value.
(c) If an external lamp is connected, insert a protective resistor so
that the current becomes lower than 500mA including an instantaneous
value.
(3) Contact output signal A2 (For MODEL 1, 2, small type MODEL 3, 30, 40)
Signal output from the servo unit to outside.
(a) Bi-polar semiconductor contact is used in the servo unit side.

The output standard is as follows.
i. Output voltage Max. 48V
ii. Output current Max. 200mA
(b) When connecting inductive loads as external relays, always insert a
CR serial structure type surge absorber near the realy. 'When
connecting a capacitance load, insert a resistor in series to limit
the current within the standard output, including instantaneous
value.
(c) When connecting an external lamp, insert a resistor for protection
limiting the output current within the standard, including
instantaneous value.
(d) The polarity of each control output signals must satisfy the
following conditions.
Signal name Symbol
Speed arrival signal SAR 1 SAR 2
Speed zero signal SST 1 SST 2
Spindle alarm signal ALM 1 ALM 2
Speed detection signal SDT 1 SDT 2
(4) Contact output signal A3 (common to all models. Refer to section 7.5.)
This signal is output from the servo unit.
(a) This signal is output by the open collector trasistor (polarized).
The output standard is as follows:
Rated voltage 30 VDC or less

Rated current 40 mADC or less
Saturated voltage 1.5 V or less (Ic = 40mA)
II - 30
(b) Signal polarity is as follows:
~ e
Alarm content
Positive (+)
ALl, AL2, AL4, AL8

Negative (-)
COM
Remarks
All models
signal
Torque limitting TLM5 TLM6 MODEL 1, 2, Small

signal type MODEL 3, 30, 40
II - 31
7.2 Spindle Control Signals
See 7.1 "Interface signal standards" for standards of the signals.
7.2.1 Emergency stop signal (ESP1, 2)
(1) When the contact is ON (closed), the spindle motor and the servo unit is
ready for operation. When the contact is off (open), the magnetic
contactor in the servo unit is OFF, and the spindle motor does not
operate.
(2) When the contact becomes OfF (open) during rotation of the motor, the
spindle motor will decelerate and stop at once. The magnetic contactor
will also become OFF after the motor stops.
(3) When this contact is turned on (closed) again, the spindle motor is
placed to be ready for rotation. It rotates immediately when the
rotation command is given. Accordingly, reset the command signals
(velocity command, forward rotation, reverse rotation commands) to the
spindle servo unit simultaneously when the emergency stop signal was
inputted.
+24V
Emergency stop signal

(Contact B)
CNI
P.SPI
(47)
L ----~-=-o-----,
l~SP2
(48)
ov
Spindle servo unit
II - 32
7.2.2 Machine ready signal (MRDY 1, 2)
(1) The setting modes of setting pins Sl, S9 on the PCB makes the following
modes.
Setting
Mode Contents
Sl S9
ON Machine ready signal is not used. Input of the

(A) ON or emergency stop signal alone will make the spindle
OFF motor ready for operation.
Machine ready signal When the contact is off

(B) OFF OFF is used to make a the electro-magnetic
operation ready status contactor will come OFF to
by double signal. cut off the motor power.
Power is cut off by

cutting the excitation
signal of the transistor
(C) OFF ON in inverter section When
the. contact is OFF the
electro-magnetic contactor
is still ON.
The following (2) to (4) are how to use the machine ready signals in
each of the above modes.
(2) Mode (A)

Used to m1.n1.m1.ze the input signal points. It is not necessary to
connect the signal line to the contact.
(3) Mode (B) (Standard setting)
G) Used to control a operation ready status by double signal. For

example, when it is necessary to set two electro-magnetic
contactor ON/OFF signal input terminals on machines where the
worker must touch the spindle directly for loading and unloading
workpieces or tool.
@ When the contact is ON (closed), the electro-magnetic contactor

turns ON, and the motor becomes ready for operation.
@ When the contact is OFF (open), the electro-magnetic contactor

turn OFF, and the power to the motor is cut off.
G) If the contact is turned OFF (open) during the rotation of the

motor, the spindle motor will decelerate to a stop at once, and
the electro-magnetic contactor will also turn OFF after the motor
stops.
Do not use the electro-magnetic contactor too frequent (some

100 times) in a single day, because it may shorten the
electro-magnetic contactor's open/close life.
II - 33
(4) Mode (C)
Used in case the open/close of the electro-magnetic contactor is

assumed to be frequent.
In machines which spindle motor is restricted by the tool unclamp

signal during operation of the automatic tool change (ATC)
orientation, the command of the load meter may become large or large
motor current may flow because of a small shift from the orientation
stop position. Cancel a orientation status during tool unclamp by
making OFF this signal for energy conservation, and to avoid the
power meter to move greatly except when cutting.
Orientation status can be made by making ON this signal without
spindle rotation at tool unclamp ending.
If the contact of the orientation command signal is still ON

(closed) in the above GD,
the OFF/ON of the contact of the machine
ready signal will only cause a small shift of the stop position; it
is not necessary to perform orientation again with another rotation.
I TIMING CHART
(Note) Setting S I: OFF ... Use machine ready signal

S9: ON ... Not turn off MCC
:~\\
Orientation command
ON
Orientation completion signal
Tool change
@
Spindle unclamp ______

OFF
Tool hold
_,
Machine ready signal ON-----------;
ON
+24 Excitation cut
Machine ready signal

r-------,
1Circuit 1
MIWY I CNI -+0--~ I
(07) I L---:..1 I
I
1Setting pin s9 l
L-----..J
MIWY2
( 08)
ov
Spindle servo unit
II - 34
7 .2.3 Forward rotation command signal (SFR)
(1) The spindle motor will start forward rotation according to the velocity
command (positive voltage) when the following three conditions are
satisfied.
CD The contact of emergency stop signal is ON (closed)
@ The contact of machine ready signal is ON (closed)
Q) The contact of forward rotation command signal is ON (closed).
(2) During contact on (closed), the spindle motor rotates counterclockwise

(CCW) as viewed from the shaft side according to the command speed.
(3) When the contact turns off (open), the spindle motor is stopped by the
regenerative braking. After stop, the base signal of transistor is
turned off to interrupt the power to the spindle motor.
7 .2.4 Reverse rotation command signal (SRV)
(1) During contact on (closed), the spindle motor turns clockwise as viewed
from the shaft side according to the command speed.
(2) When the forward rotation command signal and reverse rotation command
signal are turned on simultaneously, the spindle motor stops.
+24
SFR
Forward rotation
command signal
SRV
Reverse rotation ( 46)
command signal
OS
( 14)
ov
II - 35
7 .2.5 Code signal (option)
(1) The code signal has the following two types of inputs.
CD BCD signal input
@ Binary input
(2) A DA converter (option) must be prepared for code signal input.

Detailed explanation is given in section 4.5 "DA converter". When
operating with code signal input only, set the S4 ON (short circuit).
II - 36
7 .2.6 Analog voltage signal (DA2, E)
(1) The velocity command voltage and the motor rotation speed are in linear
proportion as shown in the following graph.
Maximum speed
Motor rotation
speed
1
0~-----------------------
ov +lOV command voltage (DC)
Command voltage
(2) Normally, command + voltage (0 to +lOOVDC). Use the forward/reverse

rotation command signals to destinguish the direction of rotation.
(3) The (±) 8 command voltages (0 to :!:lOVDC) results in the following

figure.
Forward rotation (CCW)

1'\------ Forward rotation command
1, Motor
1 signal (SFR) ON
1 ', rotation I
1 ' speed I
I ' I
I ', I
I ' I
I '
--+!---1-0:-V--------::•,--------+-
1-0y-+1- - - Velocity command
8 Voltage ', I EfJ Voltage
I ', I
I ' I
I ' I
I ' , I Reverse rotation command
------~ signal (SRV) ON
Reverse rotation
(CW)
Do not command the (±) 8 voltages in machines which tools and workpieces
break or in machines which safety cannot be guaranteed if rotated reverse
direction by a forward command.
(4) Be careful with wiring so that the velocity command voltage line is not
affected by external noises. Use a shielded wire without fail. Connect
the shield earth to terminal E.
II - 37
(5) Compose the velocity command voltage (DC 0 to +10V) circuit as shown in
the next figure. In this circuit, the manual input (analog input) and
automatic command (DA converted output) are selectable by relay. If the
velocity command voltage exceeds +10V, it is automatically clamped to
max. 10. 7V internally. Be careful since the motor revolution reaches
max. 107% of the rated value.
(6) The motor is not rotated when the velocity command voltage only is
applied. It rotates when either forward or reverse rotation command was
given.
(7) When the velocity command voltage became +10V or more, it will
automatically be internally clamped to maximum ±10. 7V. However, the
rotation speed of the motor may rise maximum 107% of the rated rotation.
(8) The movement of the motor will differ according to the ways the
velocity command voltage and the forward/reverse rotation command
signals (SFR/SRV) are given. Change the velocity command voltage
inputs as the following figure, and then set the forward/reverse
rotation command signals ON (closed).
(Wrong way) (Correct way)

0!'< ON
Forward/ reverce 0 F F OFF

rotation signal I I I
I I I
3 :
Velocity command I I I I
voltage '77/7/y ~ 1
I
I
I
: 1?777))7J?p77/) )~))))))))/)*)/)))
I I I I
0\'--------+~--------------~------
I
OV-------+--------------~1~--------
I I 1 I
I I I I
I
~
I I
I
I : I
I
Motor Sf"~cd
0 \ v \
(9) Example of connection when using the analog output of the NC.
Velocity command voltage

CNI
-, ,-, DA2 ( 31 )
I I I
I I I I
1 I 1 I
1 I I I
I I I I
Shield 1 1 1 I E
earth II I"
.~------------------~ (32)
Connect to the ground . ov
tenninal of the NC Spindle servo unit
system.
II - 38
(10) Example of connection when switching from the automatic velocity
command by code signal input to manual velocity command by variable
register on the machine operator's panel.
CNI DA
,-, ,-, DAI (30) Converter
I
I
I
Relay I
or I
I
Auto switch I
I
I DA2 (31)
Manual
Fo::~;O~O~---------\.
adjustment
, +15V (29)
Connect the shield earth Spindle servo unit

to terminal E of the spindle
servo unit
(11) The input impedance of the velocity command voltage receiver circuit is
lOOkQ.
7.2.7 +15V power supply (+15, E)
( 1) This power supply is used to give analog velocity command using the
variable register, from outside the unit in manual input.
(2) Maximum 30mA current can be used in this +15V power source.
II - 39
7.2.8 Spindle rotation speed override (OVR1, OVR2)
( 1) This signal is used to override the spindle rotation speed of the

automatic velocity command, to gain the optimum cutting condition. The
NC system also has the spindle speed override function. Use the
function of the NC system normally.
(2) When using the speed override function of the spindle servo unit,
connect the following circuit externally.
Cancellation resistance CNI
,e..;--------------;4, OVHI ( 27 )
I
I
\' R :
IkQ>·--~-o--~4-------------~~1 _o_v_R2~---+~~,.~~~_,
: (28)
sw I
I
H z~ k12 I
or I
10 kQ I OS ov
I I
\.J_ _________ - - - -
Shield line ov
Override cancel (Short SWI-2)
Speed override (Short SWl-3)
AC Spindle servo unit
(3) When performing synchronous feed as thread cutting or other external

manual velocity commands, the override must be cancelled. Switch the
circuit (short SW1-2) and set the override precisely to 100%.
' \
( '+; Setting on the spindle servo unit for speed override function and range
of override is as follows.
Setting
Function
S2 53
Speed override function not used Short Open
Speed override Override range

Up to 120% (upper limit) Open Short
function used
Up to 100% (upper limit) Open Open
II - 40
(5) The override range is determined by the resistance value of R in the
figure.
When R 1.0 KS'2 60' to 120%

R 2.4 KS'2 80 to 120%
'Yo
120
100
I
I I
Override SO ------~---,-- R =; 2.4k0
1 I
60 ------~- -~--------- R= l.Ok!l
1 I
I I
0 0.2 0.4 VR 0.6 0.8 l.OkO

Resistance of between 2 and 3
(6) If the override range upper limit is set to 100%, short cancel resistor
1.8 kS'2, since this resistor is not needed.
II - 41
7.2.9 Torque limit command signals (TLML, TLMH, OTI
(1) The torque limit is used to temporarily reduce the output torque of the
spindle motor during the spindle motor rotation in case of mechanical
spindle orientation, gear shift, etc.
(2) The machine tool builder is requested to set the orientation output
torque and the revolution at the orientation time every model so as to
reduce a shock when the machine stopper operates.
(3) The orientation output torque is adjustable by the variable resistor on

PCB within the following range.
100% Maximum torque

-----l / (when torque limit command is absent)
.,
::s
~
:'/ Maximum torque
2
;
'' (when TLMH is turned on)
Q. Maximum torque
;
0
--- (when TLML is turned on)
0 1,500 rpm
Motor speed
*When torque limit command signal TLML is turned on (closed);

Minimum: Maximum torque x 5%
Haximum: Maximum torque x 25%
*When torque limit command signal TLMH is turned on (closed);
The torque is about twice the set value (adjusting value) of the
torque limit command signal TLML.
(4) \~hen the torque limit command signal turns on (closed), the torque is
limited. (This signal is effective at once, even if this torque limit
command is given during the motor rotation.)
The torque limitng signals (TLM5, TLM6) are sent outside, immediately
when the torque is limited.
(5) For executing the mechanical orientation during ATC of a machining

center, take the following items into consideration when designing the
power magnetic sequence so as not to damage the stopper.
(a) The output torque is suppressed during orientation so as not to

allow it to be excessively large.
(b) The revolution is supressed during orientation so as not to allow it

to be excessively high. If an excessively high revolution is
detected by the speed detection signal, take the interlock not to
operate the stopper.
(c) The stopper should be securely retreated when the torque limit was
released.
II- 42
+24V
Torque limit command TLML (OS)

(Spindle low speed)
TLMH (21)
(Spindle high speed)
OT (06)
ov
If the above conditions are difficult, adopt the electric spindle

orientation (option) without stopper.
II - 43
7 .2.1 0 Alarm reset signals (ARST1, 2)
(1) After eliminating causes of alarms such as motor overheat, excessive

speed deviation, circuit short-circuit, overspeed, overvoltage,
overcurrent, overload, power drop, etc., input the alarm reset signal,
and the alarm is released to place the unit to be ready for operation.
(2) This signal is ineffective, if i t is inputted during the absence of

alarm.
(3) The servo unit is also provided with a reset switch, which has the same
function as this alarm reset signal.
7.2.11 Soft start/stop cancel signal (SCON) (for MODEL 30, 40)
(1) When the soft start/stop cancel signal is ON (closed), the soft
start/stop function becomes invalid.
(2) When the soft start/stop cancel signal is OFF (open), the soft start/stop
function is valid, and the velocity command voltage inclination can be
set for acceleration as follows.
Soft start/stop l
cancel signal I
~------------------------~
External velocity command
voltage
I
(Voltage by code signal or
analog voltage)
I
I
I
I
Internal velocity 1
command voltage_ _ __:1.:. . : ; /
w Ts Ts: Setting time
The setting time in the following table is the time from velo~ity command
voltage OV till it reaches the lOV corresponding to the rated speed.
Time to reach OV from lOV is the same.
The setting of time is done with one setting terminal (Sll) and one
variable resistor (RV20).
Setting the setting Setting time

terminal (Sll) ccw + RV20 + CW
A 0.6 sec ........... 8 sec
B 3.5 sec ........... 40 sec
(3) When the emergency stop signal input's contact is OFF, the soft
start/stop function automatically becomes invalid.
II - 44
7.3 Orientation Signal
Connected when using the spindle orientation control circuit (option).

Descriptions of the signal is mentioned in VII.
7.4 Spindle Control Output Signals
For the output signal rating, refer to Section 7.1.
7 .4.1 Speed arrival signals (SAR 1, 21
(1) The contact is turned on (closed) when the actual rotation speed of the
spindle motor reaches a certain preset range with reference to the
command speed.
Detection range (See items (2), (3)) ...-

__.
Commanded speed - - -
'
'
0
Motor speed
(Open)
SARI, 2
Commanded speed (2)
Detection range
(See items (2), (3))
Commanded speed (I) - - - -~----1
SARI, 2
(2) The preset range is adjustable within a range of +10% to 50% of the
command speed; provided that the detection range becomes wider than the
present range, if the speed is lower than 10% of the maximum revolution
speed.
II - 45
(3) This detection range of the speed arrival signals is set to +15% as the
standard setting before shipment. However, it is expanded as illustrated
below at low speed.
200
IHO
I 76% (at 0. IV /45, 60 or 80 rpm)
Ifill
·10
24% (at O.IV/45, 60 or 80 rpm)

:!0
0
0 6 8 IOV
Velocity command voltage [V]
0 1,600 3,200 4,800 6,400 8,000 rpm

0 1,200 2,400 3,600 4,800 6,000 rpm
0 900 1,800 2,700 3,600 4,500rpm
Revolutions [rpm]
If a 45/60/SOrpm velocity command is issued, the arrival signal is sent

when actual motor revolution reaches 45/60/SOrpm ±76%.
(4) This signal is not outputted, unless either SFR or SRV is turned on.
I I - 46
(5) The reverse rotation at the tapping cycle is controlled by using this
signal as follows.
FIN
SFR (forward rotation command)
ON
SRV (reverse rotation command)
ON
-1~ms
II ------------
SST (zero-speed detecting signal) OFF
SAR (speed arrival signal)
ON
T1 ~ 40ms Note: T1 time is delayed until
SAR signal turns off.
OFF
Normal rotation
Motor speed
0 Zero-speed detection range
When the reverse rotation command is sent, the spindle motor starts
deceleration, and the speed arrival signal turns off within 40ms.
Then, the next turn-on of the speed arrival signal is detected as the
reverse rotation command end.
Spindle servo unit
SARI
Speed arrival
signal
SAR2
(6) This signal is employed as the ch'eck signal (FIN signal) for forward
rotation (M03) and reverse rotation (M04) command.
II - 47
7 .4.2 Zero-speed detecting signals (SST1, 21
(1) If actual rotation speed of the spindle motor is reduced to be lower than
the zero-speed detection point when the stop command was given, the.
contact is turned on (closed).
Zero-speed detection point

(±0.75% of maximum speed as
the standard)
(Closed)
SST!, 2
(Closed) (Open)
(2) The zero-speed detection point is fixed at 0.75% of the maximum speed as
the standard.
In other words, the zero-speed detection signal turns on when the
rotation speed is lower than about 33, 45 or 60 rpm.
(3) This signal is outputted when the above condition is satisfied,

irrespective of rotation commands (SFR, SRV).
(4) The minimum pulse width value of this signal is about 40ms. (See item
7.4.1 (5))
Spindle servo unit
Zero-speed
detecting signal
II - 48
7.4.3 Speed detecting signals (SDT1, 2)
(1) The contact is turned on (closed) when the motor speed is lower than the
speed being preset on PCB.
(2) The zero-speed detection point is fixed at 0.75% of the maximum speed as
the standard.
In other words, the zero-speed detection signal turns on when the
rotation speed is lower than about 33 or 45rpm.
Spindle servo unit
CNl
Speed detecting 0 -::5:-)- 0 SDTl

-----:-
signal
'---------,(c-:-1-.,.,6),.----o SDT2
(3) The speed detection range can be set within a range of 1.5 to 67% of the
maximum speed.
It is usually set to 3% of the maximum speed (0.3V standard setting) in
case of gear change or 30% of the maximum speed (3.0V) in case of clutch
change.
The machine tool builder is requested to set the check terminal voltage
to a .desired value by the variable resistor.
Motor speed Speed detection level
I
I
I
SDTI- 2 I
vg:r~ ?cf:en)t?
"""z-r/.""/.""?7""?.,../o-r;-r~""?""?~"'?""?.,..?-r/.""7'"'%
(Closed) ~1...-----------...J,~ (Closed)
(4) The signal contact is turned on (closed) when the absolute value of the
motor speed is reduced to be lower than the preset detection level,
irrespective of rotation commands (SFR, SRV).
(Reference)
Sequence of the gear shift
The gear shift in the NC machine tool is one of sequence controls.· The
electric circuit signal on the sequence is used to move the spindle gear,
which is an importance component of the machine. It is then necessary to
check that the spindle motor revolution is in low speed to switch the
gear safely.
The following is an example of sequence at gear shift, when the velocity

detection signal (gear selectable signal) was used. This example can be
referred to when designing the magnetics sequencer.
II - 49
G) An example of gear shift sequence using velocity detection signal
(Seq\Jence) (Check signal)
Gear shift command
Low speed revolution command

of the spindll- motor
Speed detection signal ON
(Speed zero signal ON)
Speed check Turns ON when slower than
the gear selectable speed
Shifter moves
End of gear shift
To change the gear safely, i t must be checked that the spindle motor
revolution is low enough before moving the shifter. If the speed zero
signal is also applied, the safety can be doubly checked.
(Why the checking is necessary)
If the shifter moves when the spindle motor is rotating in high speed,
the gear will break.
Gear selectable motor

speed range
I
I
I
I
I Spindle motor speed
I
I I at gear shift (Low speed)
l______j
I
II
End of Gear shift
I
I
I
I
I
I ON
OFF
Speed detection signal ------...1-~--------- __ --------LL...._ _ _ _OFF
;.;..:;..;;__ _ __
! Gear selectable signal) j
Speed zero detect signaJ _ _ _ _ _ _ __.I_ _____ ___ ___ ._!_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
II - 50
7.4.4 Spindle alarm signals (ALM1, 2)
(1) If the spindle motor operation cannot be continued due to a trouble, the
spindle motor power is turned off to stop the spindle motor.
An alarm signal is also sent to the exterior concurrently. (The output
contact is open under an alarm condition.)
(2) The alarm signals employ one contact only. For the alarm contents,
refer to item 7.5 alarm contents signal.
(3) Reset the command signals (velocity command, forward rotation, reverse
rotation commands, and torque limit command) to the spindle servo unit
by using this alarm signal output without fail, otherwise the spindle
motor may turn when the alarm was released by the alarm reset, and a
dangerous accident may result.
(4) Since the spindle motor is decelerated and stopped simultaneously when
an alarm signal is outputted, it is necessary to set the emergency stop
condition or feed hold condition on NC or the power magnetics control
panel side.
(5) The contact is open under an alarm condition.

The spindle motor is being decelerated and stopped during alarm signal
off (open contact), irrespective of external commands.
(6) The relation between alarm signals and alarm reset signal is as
illustrated below.
Forward/reverse rotation
commands SFR (SRV)
Commands
ARSTI, 2
(Alarm reset)
(Open)
Servo unit
signals { ALMI. 2
(Alarm)
Eliminate a cuase of
I
I
(Closed)
an alarm
I
Motor rotation
speed I
Motor
{ (Stop)
I
I
.I
I
Motor does not operate, even
if a command is given. Usable condition
Spindle servo unit
,---
1 ,( (II)
ALMI
Alarm signal i
0- 2-)-n ALM2
'--------
II - 51
7.5 Alarm Signals
(1) The alarm conditions of the AC spindle motor and servo unit are indicated
by light-emitting diodes (LED) on PCB of the servo unit. Alarm contents
are sent to the exterior by code signals concurrently.
(2) The correspondence between LED display and alarm signals is as shown in
Table 7.5(a), (b).
I:,
~ •)
0 9
I'll. :\ 1..\ Hl\1
(green) (red)
COM _ _ _ __
(3) Description of LED display contents
! Name of LED Contents

~ --~--------------------------------------~
! PIL Green LED lights when power supply is turned on.
•-4': The alarm description signal is received by the magnetics sequencer, and
tl!e signal can also be displayed on the CRT of the NC system. Put this
~nto consideration when designing the magnetics sequencer at the machine
tool builder.
II - 52
Table 7.5 (a) Description of Alarm of MODEL 1, 2 and small type MODEL 3
LED
Meanings of
No. Contents Reset methods
alarm signals
ALB AL4 AL2 ALl
Motor This lamp lights when Natural recovery

1 0 overheat internal temperature of by cooling down
motor is higher than of motor.
the specified value.
Excessive This lamp lights when Alarm reset

2 0 deviation of the motor speed is
speed largely deviated from
the command speed.
Overtime of Detects that Reset alarm

3 0 0 regenerative regenerative current after removing
current has flown longer than the cause
the allowable time.
AC input fuse This lamp lights when Replace fuse

is blown out. an AC input fuse is after
4 0 blown out. eliminating a
cause of its
failure.
Control power This is effective when Replace fuse

fuse is blown one of fuses in the after
5 0 0 out. control power supply eliminating a
input section was blown cause of its
out. failure.-
I-- -·-
! Overs peed This lamp lights when Alarm reset
6 0 0 (Analog the motor exceeds llS%
detection) of the rated speed.
Overspeed Same as described Alarm reset.

7 0 0 0 (Digital above.
detection)
Overvoltage This lamp lights when Alarm reset

voltage largely exceeds
8 0 the rated working
voltage range due to a
tap selection failure,
etc.
Overload in This lamp lights when Natural recovery

main temperature of the by cooling
9 0 0 circuit. .radiator for cooling
semiconductor, etc.
i abnormally increases.
II - 53
LED
Meanings of
alarm signals
ALB AL4 AL2 ALl
---- r--
+lSV drop This lamp lights when Alarm reset
10 0 0 • detection the control power is after
lower than the rated eliminating a
range of +lSV. cause.
I
11 0 0 0 in power the DC power voltage of after
circuit the power supply is eliminating a
abnormally high. cause.
1--· .
Overcurrent This lamp lights when a Same as
12 0 0 circuit current is described above.
excessive.
I
I Abnormal This lamp lights when Same as

I I arithmetic microprocessor or its described above.
13 0 0 I 0 circuit peripheral parts of
i I detection arithmetic circuit are
I I I - -
abnormal.
14 0
ofa I
Abnormal ROM This lamp lights when
ROM is in abnormal.
Replace ROM
o This mark indicates that the corresponding LED lights.
II - 54
Table 7.5 (b) Description of Alarm of MODEL 3 to 40
LED
Meanings of Reset methods
No. Contents
alarm signals
AL8 AL4 AL2 ALl
Motor This lamp lights when Natural recovery

1 0 overheat internal temperature of by cooling down
motor is higher than of motor.
the specified value.
Excessive This lamp lights when Alarm reset

2 0 deviation of the motor speed is
speed largely deviated from
the command speed.
Fuse in DC This lamp lights when Replace fuse

3 0 0 link is blown. the fuse in DC power after
out. supply is .blown out. eliminating a
cause of its
failure.
AC input fuse This lamp lights when Replace fuse

is blown out. an AC input fuse is after
4 0 blown out. eliminating a
cause of its
failure.
Control power This is effective when Replace fuse

fuse is blown one of fuses in the after
5 0 0 out. control power supply eliminating a
input section was blown cause of its
out. failure.
Over speed This lamp lights when Alarm reset

6 0 0 (Analog the motor exceeds ll5%
detection) of the rated speed.
Overspeed Same as described Alarm reset.

7 0 0 0 (Digital above.
detection)

voltage largely exceeds
8 0 the rated working
voltage range due to a
tap selection failure,
etc.
Overload in This lamp lights when Natural recovery

main temperature of the by cooling
9 0 0 circuit. radiator for cooling
semiconductor, etc.
abnormally increases.
II - 55
LED
Meanings of
alarm signals
ALS AL4 AL2 ALl
+15V drop This lamp lights when Alarm reset

10 0 0 detection the control power is after
lower than the rated eliminating a
range of + 15V. cause.

11 I) 0 0 in power the DC power voltage of after
circuit the power supply is eliminating a
abnormally high. cause.
Over current This lamp lights when a Same as

12 0 0 circuit current is described above.
excessive.
Abnormal This lamp lights when Same as

arithmetic microprocessor or its described above.
13 0 0 0 circuit peripheral parts of
detection arithmetic circuit are
abnormaL
Abnormal ROM This lamp lights when Replace ROM

14 0 0 0
ROM is in abnormal.
15 0 0 0 0 Abnormality Detects abnormality in Reset alarm ·

in optional optional circuit as after removing
circuit spindle selection the cause.
circuit, and
abnormal:i..ty in
connection with the
optional circuit.
II - 56
7.6 Speed Indication Vol~e (SM1, OM)
(1) The rotation speed of the spindle motor can be indicated by externally
connecting a speedometer.
.-,
+lOV
u
Q
'-'
"'
till
!!
0
>
:;
Q,
:;
0
ov 4,500/6,000/8000 rpm
0
(Forward rotation/reverse
Motor rotation speed rotation)
A voltage (DC) proportional to the rotation speed is outputted,

irrespective of the forward or reverse rotation of the motor. A +10V is
outputted at the maximum revolution 4,500/p,000/8,000 rpm.
(2) Use the following speedometer (DC voltmeter)

o One-sided deflection DC voltmeter
o DC voltage 10V full scale
o Internal resistance higher than 10 kilo ohm
(3) The speed indication voltage is used for the speedometer, and the
forward rotation/reverse rotation output voltages are not calibrated.
The voltage accuracy is max. +3%.
Spindle servo unit
SMl
Speed indication
voltage Speedometer
Load indication
voltage
Load meter
ov
(4) SM1, LM1, and OM indication interface can be used from terminal board TB
as well as connector CN1.
Use a 2-conductor shielded cable.
II - 57
7.7 Load Indicator Voltage (LM1, OM)
(1) The load indicator indicates the load factor, which is the ratio of
load to the maximum output obtainable by the spindle motor at the ir
voltage and working revolutions when the machine tool spindle
rotating without load or when cutting is in progress.
(2) The revolutions-to-spindle motor output relation, revolutions-to-tor

relation and revolutions-to-indicating voltage relation are
illustrated below approximately when the rated input voltage is appli
Maximum output of motor

I (~ 30 min. rated output x 1 20%
I
I 30 min. rated output
-------!---.._
I -
I1 - - - - - - Con t·muous rate d output

I
I
1 < . . - - - - - - ' - - - - - . . . 1 . - - - - _.L_ _ _ _.J...
0 1500 3000 4500 6000 rpm Motor revolutions
(Basic speed)
T
..,
='
8'
.8
...
.80 E
E~
•
~
l Maximum torque of motor

("='=' 30 min. rated torque x 120%)
.,-
~
·--
:ac 30 min. rated torque
·o.
Cll
1 ---Continuous rated torque
~---~----~----L----~
0 1500 3000 4500 6000 Motor revolutions
o~-----'-----...1...-----~-----L
0 1500 3000 4500 6000 Motor revolutions
(Note I)
(Note 1) The relation at motor revolutions 4500 to 6000 rpm applies to thE
load indicator for MODEL 3, 6 only.
II - 58
(3) The relation between each spindle motor output and the indicating voltage
of the load indicator is as shown in Table 7. 7 (a) , assuming that the
continuous rated output of the spindle motor is 100%.
(4) Three types of indications of the load indicator may be considered

approximately from Table 7.7(a). For the indication of the load
indicator in this case, refer to examples shown in Table 7.7(b).
(5) Machine tool builders are requested to prepare a load indicator (DC
voltmeter) which complies with the following speciftcation.
o One-side deflecting DC voltmeter
o DC voltage 10V, full scale
o Internal resistance 10 kilo ohm
(Example) DC voltmeter LM-80 made by KUWANO DENKI
Table 7.7 (a) Relation between each spindle motor output and indicating voltage of load indicator
Example of load indicator

Indicating Ratio (%)
Output voltage assuming Type of Ratio (%)
Model (kW) of load that conti- applicable to full
indicator (V) nuous rated load scale
is 100% indicator 150%/180%
1.5 5.7 100 102.2
1 2.2 8.3 147 A 150
2.64 10.0 176 180
2.2 5.0 100 100
2, 2H,
2VH
3.7 8.3 166 c 166
4.4 10.0 200 200
3.7 5.6 100 100.8
3, 3H,
3VH, 8P 5.5 8.3 148 A 150
6.6 10.0 178 180
5.5 6.1 100 109.8
6, 6H,
7.5 8.3 136 A 150
6VH, 12P
9.0 10.0 164 180
7.5 5.7 100 102.6
8, 8H 11.0 8.3 146 A 150
13.2 10.0 175 180
12, 12H, 11 6.1 100 109.8
12VH, 12HV, 15 8.3 136 A 150
22P 18 10.0 164 180
15 6.7 100 100.5
15, 15HV 18.5 8.3 124 B 125
22.2 10.0 149 150
18.5 7.0 100 105
18, 18H 22.0 8.3 118 B 125
26.4 10.0 142 150
22.0 7.0 100 105
22, 22H 26.0 8.3 118 B 125
31.2 10.0 142 150
30.0 6.7 100 100.5
30, 30HV 37.0 8.3 124 B 125
44.4 10.0 149 150
37.0 6.8 100 103
40, 40HV 45.0 8.3 122 B 125
54.0 10.0 146 150
I I - 59
Table 7.7 (b) Examples of types of load indicators
Type Indication of load indicator Remarks
Color Yellow Red

White band
division I I ·I I band band
I I I I I I I ~~
For MODEL 1,
Indica-
I I I I I I I I 3, 6, 8, 12,
tion 0 50 100 150 180 3H, 6H, 8H,
A I % 12H, 3VH, 6VH,
I
Corre- I I
I
I
I
I 12VH, 8P, 12P,
I I
spond- I I I 22P, SOP
ence ov 5.55V 8.3V 10.0V
to
voltage
Color Yellow Red

division W_h_it_e_b_an_d_ _ _ _...,j_b_an_d_ _,.~_ban_d--11
For MODEL 15,
fool_ _ _ _
18, 22, 30, 40,

B
Indication
I,J,I,I'I'I,I,J,I,I,I,J,IE
0 50 100
18H, 22H, 30HV,
125 150 40HV, 15P, 18P,
I % 30P, 40P
I
I
I I
I
I I
Correspond-
ence to OV 6.66V 8.3V 1 o.ov
voltage
Yellow Red
Color White band band band
c !n::::i._. .,1~. . .~1. . . ,1-J. !. . ~. I_,L. . I.! . . _.,!-J. I-~. .i -~. .I~ L. . .I.t. ;.~a. ~" "'~l
0 50 100
....1........,1-J..!
150166
I
200
For MODEL 2,
2H, 2VH
I
I
1%
I /<
I
I
I 1 I
I I
· Correspond-
~~~
i l
I
I
I
I
voltage 0V 5.0 V 8.3V 10.0V
II - 60
Ill. DIGITAL AC SPINDLE SERVO UNIT (MODELS 3- 22)
1. OUTLINE
This section describes digital AC spindle servo unit for AC SPINDLE MOTORS,
MODEL 3, 6, 8, 12, 15, 18, 22, 30 and 40 for spindle driving of NC machine
tools.
(1) Confirming digital spindle servo unit specification

The spindle servo unit is specified as follows.
Ex) A06B-6055-H106 #HSOl

(A) (B)
(A): Power circuit and control PCB. Indicated on the label of the
spindle servo unit.
(B): Control ROM. ROM series is indicated on the ROM label. The
lower two digits of ROM series show the lower two digits of
(B).
(Ex) ROM label (B)

9601 #H501
Label ROM label
AC SPINDLE SERVO UNIT

TYPE NO. A06B-6055-Hl06 -+--(A) l%0i"=t-(B)
MFG. K6X-000103A
FANUC LTD. ~
2. FEATURES
(1) Improvement of performance

(a) Response characteristics have been improved for stable, high cutting
performance.
(b) Improvement of tapping performance
Elongation of tapper can be shortened because of improvement of
acceleration/deceleration performance in low speed range. It
realizes the tap machining of higher speed.
(c) Improvement of rigidity at orientation
Stable tool change can be made even though spindle speed is
accelerated faster than motor speed.
(d) Reducing of adjustment process
Adjustment process can be reduced as measurement of spindle rotation
number is made in digital method without using instruments.
(e) Improvement of linearity of load meter
Load condition on the motor can be accurately checked with the load
meter.
(2) Improvement of flexibility

Easy change of maximum rotation (revolution) number and output limit
value can be made with parameter setting system.
III - 1
3. CONFIGURATION AND ORDER NUMBER
3.1 Configuration
Digital AC SPINDLE SERVO UNIT consists of the following unit(s) and

parts.
(1) Spindle control unit (Basic)
(2) Fuses (Basic)
(3) Connectors (Basic)
(4) DA converter (Option)
(5) Power transformer (Option)
(6) Spindle orientation control circuit (Option)
(7) Unit cover (Option for only MODEL 3, 6, 8 and 12)
(8) Unit adaptor (Option for only MODEL 8 and 12)
(9). Speed gain switching control circuit (Option)
AC Spindle Servo Unit
(Basic)
r----,I
I
r--------,I
I Spindle
Connectors
I: L--J
I
Magnetic: sequence
control
:--- control
unit
1 1 Fuses
I : I I
I NC I L...--------...l
: I AC spindle motor
"I I
I I (Qption)
I
1...---...l
I
I D/A converter II Unit cover
Spindle orientioa
conuol circuit
Velocity gain Unit adaptor

selector circuit
+
I
I
I
I
I
r I
:
3-phase power supply I
I
I
Power transfonner
L-------- (option)
III - 2
3.2 Types of Units and Their Combinations
Basic Option
Spindle control unit Velocity

Spindle Spindle gain
servo Internal External DA orien- change Power
unit Ventila- radiation Con- Con- tat ion control trans- Unit Unit
model tion type type nectors Fuses verter circuit circuit former cover adaptor
MODEL 3 0 0 -
0
MODEL 6 0 0 -
0
l'I)DEL 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 type
MODEL 12 0 0 2 type 0 2 types 8 types 1 type
MODEL 15 0 0 0 - -
l'I)DEL 18 0 0 0 - -
MODEL 22 0 0 0 - -
III - 3
4. SPECIFICATIONS
4.1 Spindle Control Unit .
4.1.1 Specifications
For specification of the spindle control unit, refer to section I-3.
4.1.2 Functions
The spindle control unit rectifies three-phase AC input, and converts it

into DC so as to perform the velocity control of the AC spindle motor through
transistor PWM inverter.
The spindle control unit is provided with a protective and fault
detection function as shown in (1) for the purpose of protecting machine, AC
spindle motor, and AC spindle servo unit, if a trouble occurred. It also
provides an auxiliary function as shown in (2) for monitoring the operating
conditions of the spindle.
(1) Protective and fault detection functions

Motor overheat An alarm is issued, i f the Display of seven
detection internal temperature of AC segments in five
spindle motor abnormally digits
increases.
Excessive velocity An alarm is issued, i f the AC Display of seven

deviation spindle motor speed is largely segments in five
detection deviated from the commanded digits
speed due to an overload, etc.
Main circuit input If the main circuit input Display of seven

fuse current is excessively high due segments in five
to a ground fault, etc., the digits
alarm
DC link fuse If the DC link current is Display of seven

excessively high due to a fault segments in five
of the power circuit, etc., the digits
alarm.
Over speed If the AC spindle motor exceeds Display of seven

detection 100 to 115% of the rated maximum segments of five
speed, an alarm is issued. digits
III - 4
Overvoltage If the AC input power circuit Display of seven

detection voltage exceeds the rated segments in five
voltage range, an alarm is digits
issued.
Main circuit If the temperature at radiation Display of seven

overload detection of power circuit abnormally segments in five
increases, an alarm is issued. digits
Undervoltage If the control power voltage Display of seven

detection abnormally lowers, an alarm is segments in five
issued. digits
DC link I f the DC link voltage Display of seven

overvoltage abnormally increases, an alarm segments in five
is issued. digits
Abnormal current I f an abnormal large current Display of seven

detection flows to the main circuit, an segments in five
alarm is issued. digits
Abnormal An alarm is issued, i f Display of seven

Arithmetic circuit microprocessor or its peripheral segments in five
detection parts of arithmetic circuit is digits
abnormal.
Abnormal ROM An alarm is issued, if ROM is in Display of seven

detection trouble. segments in five
digits
III- 5
(2) Auxiliary functions
The AC spindle control unit provides the following auxiliary functions.
Item No. Auxiliary functions Description
1 Loadmeter output The 10-DVC meter (one-sided deflection

2 Speedmeter output The 10-DVC meter (one-sided deflection

3 Speed zero signal Stop of spindle motor can be confirmed.

output
4 Speed arrival This signal indicates that the spindle

signal output motor has reached the commanded speed.
5 Override Override to the command speed (auto) is

possible.
6 Speed detection The clutch changeable speed and gear

signal output changeable speed can be confirmed to be
lower than a certain speed.
7 Torque limit The output torque of the spindle motor can

be temporarily made small and rotated.
8 Display of Actual number of revolution of motor is

revolution number displayed in five digits, seven segments.
of motor
9 Selection of output Various kinds of output limit patterns can

limit pattern be selected with setting of parameter.
• No output limit is made
• Output limit is made only at
acceleration/deceleration
. Output limit is made only at normal
rotation.
• Output limit is made for all functions.
Divide the maximum output by 100 for

setting.
10 Selection of rigid Necessary response characteristics for

tapping mode rigid tapping can be selected by setting of
parameter and input of contact signal.
III - 6
4.2 Resistor Unit
4.3 Connector
4.4 Fuses
4.5 DA Converters (option)
4.6 Spindle Orientation Circuit (option)
4.7 Power Transformer (option)
4.8 Unit Cover
4.9 Fan Unit
4.10 Unit Adaptor
See the items 4.2 to 4.10 in CHAPTER II for above items 4.2 to 4.10.
5. CONNECTIONS
5.2 Details of Connection Diagram
5.2.1 Power connection
Refer to section II-5.2.

5.2.2 Connection between AC spindle servo unit and magnetic cabinet
Refer to section II-6.2.2. Settings Sl to S9 are rewarded.
F-01 to F-09 for digital.

Setting Parameter
Sl F-01
S2 F-02
S3 F-03
S4 F-04
S9 F-09
5.2.3 Connection between AC spindle servo unit and AC spindle motor
Refer to section II-6.2.3.
III - 7
6. RIGID TAPPING
Response characteristics needed for the normal operation mode and the
rigid tapping mode are different from each other when using AC spindle motor.
Noise on the spindle may possibly get louder depending on machines when
response characteristics are improved. Therefore, the parameter for selecting
rigid tapping mode that improves response characteristics to the extent
without such a trouble has been set for rigid tapping, according to the type
of machine. Make setting and control specified as fpllow:
(1) Selection of rigid tapping mode

Select the mode number IF-3Il to set the display as I00011 at rigid
tapping.
(2) Contact signal TLML-OT

Apply power sequence to close the contact signal TLML-OT when rigid
tapping is made.
TLML (5)
OT (6)
ov
(3) Check of ready signal

Check the contact point of control output signal TLMS and 6 is closed as
ready signal, to start rigid tap machining.
TLMS (9)
TLM6 (10)
(4) Improvement of response characteristics

Select the mode number J F-34j to set the display as I0100 j when rigid
tapping is made.
Lower the setting from 0100, 0099, to 0050 to input proper data, when the
spindle on the machine makes noise. Possible setting range:
Cautions on application: 0100 - 0010
Note that the torque limit command signal TLML can not be used when the
above mode is selected.
Use the torque limit command signal TLMH when torque limit is necessary.
III - 8
IV. AC SPINDLE MOTOR HIGH-sPEED series (MODELS 2H - 22H. 2VH - 12VH)
1. GENERAL
AC spindle motor high-speed series is most suitable for a high-speed

spindle of NC machine tool. This high-speed series includes two types,
depending on the bearing lubrication systems (grease lubrication/oil-air
lubrication) •
2. FEATURES
1) This series is capable of heavy cutting up to a high-speed area.
2) The external dimensions of motor are the same as those of the standard
series; therefore, this series can be installed without any design
change in the machine.
3) The motor is of the keyless construction for well balancing; therefore,

this series achieves a low vibration, that is, VS (5 /LID peak-to-peak)
high-speed specification, thus assuring a quiet, stable high-speed
rotation.
IV - 1
3. SPECIFICATIONS
High-speed series
High-speed series (Grease lubrication) (Oil-air lubrication)
----.----.--·--r----.~~~==~~~
- - - Hodels 2H 3H 6H 8H 12H 158 188 22H 2VH 3VH 6VH 12VH
Items -----
Continuous
rated 2.2 ! 3.7 5.5 7.5 ! 11 1 15 18.5 I
i
22 2.2 3. 7 5.5 11
output(*1) ; I
kW(HP)
(3.0) (5.0) (7.4) (10) ! (14. 7) ! (20.1) (24.8) i (29.5) I (3.o> (5.o> 1 (7.4) (14. 7)
Rated output I II
Out- for 30 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 , 15 18.5 22 26 3. 7 5.5 7.5 15

put minutes (5.0) (7.4) (10) (14.7) I (20.1) i (24.8) (29.5) (34.9) (5.0) (7.4) (10) (20.1)
power ( *1, *4) lSmin 15min
kW (HP)
50% ED rated I
output 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 I 11 15 18.5 22 26 3. 7 5.5 11.15
(*1,*2) (5.0) (7.4) (10) (14.7) (20.1) (24.8) (29.5) (34.9) (5.0) (7.4) (10) (20.1)
kW (HP)
Rot Base speed 3000 1500 1500 1500 T1 -1-5-00-+-1-5_0_0-+-15-0-0-ii-15-00--+-5-0o-o-+-5-oo-o-+-5-0_o_o+-300-0-l
" a-It'll~~
~ ~~~:d~l~f.=.uwmr.=~s=p~e~ea.-t-15_0_0_0-r-1-200-0-+-1-2-000--~~-8-0_0_0-+-80_0_0-i-8-000--r-6-00-0-+-6-000·---+,-20-000--+-2-00-0-0-+-2-000-0-t-1-5-0-00-;
El
iOutput torque (*5) 7 23.5 35.0 47.7 70 95.4 117.7 140 4.2 7 10.5 35.0
! i N.m (kg.cm) 71.4) (240) (357) (487) (714) (974) , (1201) (1428) (42.8) (72.1) (107) (357)
...
!; !GD2 kg.m 2 0.031 0.086 0.086 I 0.36 0.36 0.36 0. 72 0. 72 0.031 0.086 0.086 0.36
:I Rotor inertia 0.008 0.022 0.0221 0.091 0.091 0.091 0.179 0.179 0.008 0.022 0.022 0.091
c.J l N.m.sec 2 I
< ! (kg.cm.sec 2 ) (0.08) (0.22) j (0.22) (0.93) (0.93) (0.93) (1.83) (1.83) (0.08) (0.22) (0.22) (0.93)
! Weight kg 27 60 60 110 110 110 190 190 27 70 70 130
I Vibration V5
i Noise 75dB 80dB 75dB I 80dB
Cooling system Totally enclosed
1 Installation Motor should be used so that the output shaft is horizontal or vertical.
j Allowable overload
: capacity (1 min.) 120% of rated output for 30 minutes (15 minutes for Hodel 2H) rating
Insulation Class F
! .Ambient temperature 0 - 40"C
i Painting color Munsell system N2.5
I Accessories Pulse generator and thermostat
Bearing lubrication Grease I 011-air
..., i 30-minute rated power 7 9 12 17 22 26 32 37 7 9 12 22
.. ~ capacity kVA
; 1Power~s~up~p~l~y~(*-3~)~-+----~------L-----~-----2~00~/2_2_0~/~2~30__V_AC--,~.-1-0%--,---1~5%
__ ;_5_0~/60~-Hz--!-1~Hz------~----~-----l
~ : Main circuit I
..
: : Feedback
Transistor PWM inverter
Velocity feedback by pulse generator

! I Braking system Regenerative braking
~ ' Input command +10 VDC (Max. speed) - 0 VDC (stop)
.. ·voltage
: ---~-----~1~5~0--~~~12~0~-----,---------,------~~20~0~--------,-1-5~0--~
"' Speed control 15000 12000 rpm 80 - 8000 rpm 60 - 6000 rpm 20000 15000
< range rpm I rpm rpm
c1:1oo> 1 c1:1oo> c1:1oo> c1:1oo> C1:1oo>
Speed regulation Less than 0.1% of the maximum speed (at load fluctuation from 10% to 100%)
(*1) The rated output is guaranteed at the rated input voltage (200/220/230 VAC). If the input voltage fluctuates, it is
possible that the rated output cannot be obtained even when such functions are within the allowable fluctuation range.
(*2) The cycle time is 10 minutes, 50% ED:ON 5 minutes, OFF 5 minutes.
(*3) If the power supply voltage is other than specified a transformer is needed.
(*4) For model 1 and 2 output power at 15-minute rated power.
(*5) !his output is guaranteed in the condition specified later.
I
I
I
IV - 2 I
!
4. OUTPUT CHARACTERISTICS
4.1 High-speed Series (Grease Lubrication)
1) Model 2H
kW
4
/ 15 min. 50% ED operation zone (3.7kW)
Output
3
v I I I I
~v
2
Co~tinuous ~peratio~ zone (2.?kW)
1/ 2
I
4 6
I
8
I I
10 12 14 15 16
Motor speed (x lOOOrpm)
2) Model 3H
Output
1.1
6,000 8,000 10,000 12,000 rpm

Motor speed
3) - Model 6H
kW
8
Output
3.7
2.000 4,000 6, 000 8,000 10,000 12,000 rpm

Motor speed
IV - 3
4) Model 8H
kW
16~----~--~~--~----~----~----~----~----~
30 min. 50% ED operation zone ( llkW)
6,000 7,000 8,000rpm

Motor speed
5) Model 12H
7.5
5.5
1,000 2,000 3,000 4,000 5,000 6,000 7,000 8,000 rpm

Motor speed
6) Model lSH
Output
I Or---~~--~~--~
1,000 2,000 3,000 4,000 5,000 6.000 7,000 8,000rpm

Motor speed
7) Model 18H
kW
30
, 30 lin. SO% ~D operJtion zon1 (22kW)

Output
20
~
r Continuous operation zone ( 18.5kW)
v
1J 10
0
0 1,000 2.000 3,000 4,000 5.000 6,000rpm
Motor speed
IV - 4
8) Model 22H
22
Output 20 t----++r---4------1-----+------<-=-=--~ 1 8. 5
00~--~~--~~~~~--~~~~~~~~~
1,000 2,000 3,000 4,000 5,000 6,000 rpm
Motor speed
IV - 5
4.2 High-speed Series (Oil-air Lubrication)
1) Model 2VH
kW
4
3
I 30 min. 50% ED operation zone (3.7kW)
I I I i
Output
2
/, ContLuous oderation zlne (2.2JW)
I/
1
y 5.000 10.000 15.000 20,000rpm

Motor speed
2) Model 3VH
kW
8
Output
I 30 min. 50% ED operation zone (S.SkW)
I I I I
Iy
4
Continuous operation zone (3.7kW)
0 z
0 3,000 6,000 9,000 12.000
Motor speed
15,000 20,000rpm
3) Model 6VH
kW
8
I I I
I 30 min. 50% ED operation zone (7.5kW)

I I. I
V;
6
I I I
Continuous operation zone (S.SkW)
Output
4
/; v
2
If 3,000 6,000 9,000 12.000

Motor speed
15,000 20,000rpm
IV - 6
4) Model 12VH
kW
16
I I
30 min. SO% ED operation zone (lSkW)
12
J I I I I
Output /; I I
Continuous operation zone (llkW)
y
8
v
4
3,000 6,000 9,000 12,000 15,000 rpm

Motor speed
IV - 7
5. CAUTIONS ON USE
1) Allowable radial load
Use the motor output axis with an allowable radial load or less listed
below, where no thrust load should be applied on principles:
Motor type Allowable Allowable

radial load Motor type
radial load
Model 2H 50 kg Model 2VH 50 kg
Model 3H Model 3VH

100 kg Oil-air
Model 6H lubrication
Model 6VH 80 kg
Grease
lubrication Model 8H Model 12VH
Model 12H 150 kg
Model 15H
Model 18H
400 kg
Model 22H
Note) The above allowable radial load is the value when the load operating
points is placed on the output axis edge.
Perform adjustment of tension when using a belt for transmission of power so

that the above allowave value may not be exceed.
2) Oil air lubrication
Items Conditions
Amount of oil supply 0.03 cc/16 min
Oil type - Turbine oil or spindle oil 32 est
Amount of air 20 NL/min. (dry air)
Air pressure 3.5 - 4.5 kg/cm 2
Drain pipe Internal diameter ~6 mm or more, Length 300 mm or

less
· IV- 8
V. AC SPINDLE MOTOR POWER-UP series (MODELS SP- SOP)
1. GENERAL
The AC spindle motor power-up series are used for eliminating speed shift
mechanism of machine spindle and for simplifying the constructin.
2. FEATURES
1) The constant output range is so wide (1:8) that the shift mechanism such
as gear becomes unneeded for simplifying the machine constructin.
At the same time, vibration and nois~ produced by the gear-shift

mechanism can be eliminated.
2) Efficiency of machine tools can be improved.
Conventionally, it was necessary to stop the spindle for shifting speed on

gear change. However, using the power-up series AC spindle motor, loss
time such as gear change time can be minimized.
3) Regardless of its compact external shape, it achieves a great low-speed

torque.
4) Fan exhaust direction can be selectable between front exhaust type and
rear exhaust type as in the standard series to allow deformation of
machine due to heat to be minimized.
v- 1
3. SPECIFICATIONS
Series Power-up series

---
I~ Continuous
8P 12P 15P 18P 22P 30P 40P SOP
rated output 3.7 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22

(*1) (5.0) (7 .4) (10.0) (12.0) (14.7) (20.1) (24.8) (29.5)
kW (HP)
Out- Rated output
put for 30
power minutes 5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22(*5) 30(*5)
(*1,*4) (7.4) (10.0) (12.0) (14. 7) (20.1) (24.8) (29.5) (40. 2)
kW (HP)
50% ED rated s.s 7.5 9 11 15
output 18.5 22 30
(*1, *2) kW (HP) (7.4) (10.0) (12.0) (14.7) (20.1) (24.8) (29.5) (40. 2)
Rota- rpm speed

Base 750 750 750 750 750 575 575 575
ting speed
speed Maximum
rpm 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 4500 4500 4500
1-o
0
.u
Out)ut torque N.m 47.1 70 95.5 114.6 140.1 249 307 365
0 (*4 (kg.cm) (480) (714) (974) (1169) (1429) (2542) (3135 (3729)
e
cv
.... GD 2 kg.m 2 0.11 0.36 0.36 0.51 0.51 1.18 1.18 2.48
'C
I:
.....Q. Rotor N.m.sec 2 0.027 0.091 0.091 0.126 0.126 0.29 0.29 0.62
inertia 2
u "' (kg.cm.sec ) (0.28) (0. 93) (0.93) (1. 29) (1. 29) ( 3. 0) (3.0) (6.33)
< Weight kg 80 110 110 143 143 250 250 460
Vibration V5 V10
Noise 75dB 80dB
Installation Motor should be used so that the output shaft is
horizontal or vertical.
Allowable overload 120% of rated output for 30 minutes (15 minutes for Model 1, 2) rating.
capacity (1 min.)
Insulation Class F
Ambient temperature o - 40°C
Painting color Munsel system N2.5
Bearing lubrication Grease
30-minute rated 9 12 15 17 22
power capacity kVA 26 32 44
.u
..... Power supply (*3) 200/220/230 VAC, +10%, -15%; 50/60 Hz +1 Hz
I:
::s Main circuit Transiistor PWM inverter
0
>
1-o Feedback Velocity feedback by pulse generator
cv
"'
cv
Braking system Regenerative braking
.... Input command
'C +10 VDC (Max. speed) - 0 VDC (stop)
.....cQ. voltage
Speed control 60 - 6000 rpm 45 - 4500 rpm
u"' range (speed ratio 1:100) (Speed ratio 1:100)
<
Speed regulation Less than 0.1% of the maximum speed
(at load fluctuation from 10% to 1000~)
(*1) The rated output is guaranteed at the rated input voltage (200/220/230 VAC). If the input
voltage fluctuates, it is possible that the rated output cannot be obtained even when such
functions are within the allowable fluctuation range.
(*4) Output torque means the continuous rated torque in rated torque range.
(*5) This output is guaranteed in the condition specified later.
v- 2
1) Model 8P
kW
8
6
/30-minute, 50% ED operation zone"
i .,
"'"'
Power I (5.5kW)
4
2
I! Continuous operation zone
(3.7kW)
.......
3.7
2.2
00
If 1.000 2.000 3,000
Motor speed
4,000 5,000 6,000 rpm
2) Model 12P
kW
8
I 30-minur, 50% EID opera,on zone r.5kW)
6
Power
4
I!1 Continuous operation zone (5.5kW)
2 J
0 ~
0 1,000 2.000 3,000 4,000 5,000 6,000 rpm
Motor speed
3) Model 15P
kW
12
30-minute, 50% ED operation zone (9kW)

9
7.5
Power
6
5.5
1J
1,000 2.000 3,000 4,000 5,000 6,000 rpm

Motor speed
v - 3
4) Model 18P
kW
12
l I I I
tO-minuie, SO% E~ operatir zone ( llkW)
9
I~
Continuous operation zone (9kW)
Power
6
1J
3
I
I 1,000 2,000 3,000 4,000 5,000 6,000 rpm
Motor speed
5) Model 22P
kW
16
I 30-minute, SO% ED operation zon~
(IISkw) r I I "-.
Power
12
8
/1 Continuous operation zone ( llkW).......,
~9
......... 11
1J I
4 L
I 1,000 2,000 3,000 4,000 5,000 6,000 rpm

Motor speed
6) Model 30P
(kW)
25r-----r-----.-----.-----~-,
2 0 r- 30-minute, 50% ED operation zone (I8.5kW)
I I I I '""'-
continuous operation zone r--...._
15~~--~----r-----~~~+L~~~15WW
Power (lSkW) ""
10~r+--r-----~----+--+--~~
~11kW
00~--~~--~~--~~--~~~~--~
1,000 2,000 3,000 4,000 4,500 rpm
Motor speed
v - 4
7) Model 40P
(kW)
25
30-~inute, 5~ ED ope~ation zon~ (22kW)
I
20 - I -continuous I I ~
operation zone
15
{18.5kW) "
~
" 18.5kW
15kW
Power
10
5
575 3450
00 1,000 2,000 3,000 4,000 4,500 rpm

Motor speed
8) Model SOP
(kW) 30-minute, 5.0% ED operation zone {30kW)

30
25 ~
'
~
Continuous operation
zone (22kW)
20
~
Power
15
10
' 15kW
5 ---575 3000
00 1,000 2,000 3,000 4,000 4,500 rpm

Motor speed
v- 5
5. CONNECTION
Primary winding
Connector connections
(j) Blue Q) Black Q) Red
PB PA +5V
®White G) Green @Yellow

r-- RB RA ov
® <ID (j)
OH2 ss OH1
AMP Umversal MATE-N-LOK Connector

Housing 350782-1 350720-1
Contact 350706-7 350689-6
Model Terminal name
U, v, w, G FMU to FMW
8P, 12P, ISP, 18P, 22P MS M4

30P, 40P, SOP M8 M4
v - 6
Note) When ambient temperature is high in model 40P/50P servo units,
continuous usage time of a motor at 30 minutes rated output is shown
below due to heat limitation of servo units.
oc
.......s::
ca
...
Ql
c:lo Cooling by (A)
o- m
s:: Ql
....... =
0""'
s::
ca.,..
= a
....s::-
... Cll
s:: a
0 ....
Q.j.l
00
.......s::
...ca
Ql
Q,
o- Cooling by (A)
m
s::o ...
Ql
.""'S::
.=
CIS.,..
=a
....s::-
.j.IQI
s::o ....a
Q.j.l
Fan motor
Cover
Fan motor
Air
radiation fin
radiation fin
(A) (B) Air

External heat radiation fin cooling method
Note 1) In the case of internal ventilation, the extent of cooling is
approximately the same as that by (B).
Note 2) Use the MINEBEA 5915PC-20W-B20-04 or its equivalents as a fan
motor.
v - 7
6. CAUTIONS ON USE
1) Fan motor for cooling motors
Three-phase fan motor is used for cooling the motor in the power-up
series for achieving improved motor performance.
Therefore, prepare a fuse (or breaker) for protecting a fan motor as

shown below:
Terminal box SA
Fuse or breaker 200 VAC

Motor
Power magnetics cabinet
2) Key dimension
The key dimension is the same as that of standard series for shaft
diameter.
Key
Shaft diameter
Width Height Length
!632 h6 10 +0, -0.036 8 70
!648 h6 14 +0, -0.043 9 90
!655 m6 16 +0, -0.043 10 90
!660 m6 18 +0, -0.043 11 110
~80 m6 22 +0, -0.052 14 150
v- 8
3) Allowable radial load
Use the motor shaft with the allowable radial load within the range
shown below.
Model Allowable radial load (kg) Bearing of shaft
8P 300 6210
12P, 1SP 300 6312
18P, 22P 4SO
30P, 40P sso 6314
SOP 1100 6317
Note) The above allowable radial load is given when the load is applied to the
shaft end. The allowable load will be lessened when the center of belt
tension is out of the shaft end.
Adjust the belt tension within the above value. When using the spiral gear be
sure not to apply the thrust load to the shaft.
4) Do not mount the motor where the cutting oil is splushed.
S) Dynamic balance
The dynamic balance of the rotor along with the half thickness of the half
key shown in the external dimensions is performed.
6) Connector box
a) All electric wiring is connected to the terminals and connector of the

connector box.
b) For models 8P to 22P the plastic connector box is used. The
connection is shown below.
c) For models 30P and SOP the alminum connector box is used. The
connection is same as other models.
d) For model SOP the side plate is used in the connector box. The
connection is same as the conventional type.
.Conduit (Elbow, etc.)
Tight using the nut.
v- 9
VI. AC SPINDLE MOTOR 380/415 VAC INPUT series (MODELS 30HV, 40HV)
1. OUTLINE
The AC spindle motor 380/415 VAC input series does not require the power
transformer for a power supply of 380/415 VAC input and allows direct
connection to the power supply of 380/415 VAC.
2. FEATURES
1) It uses the newest power electronics technology and allows an input

power supply of 380/415 VAC to be directly connected to the AC spindle
servo unit for driving the motor.
2) Its construction allows the main heat radiation part to be cooled by

external air and allows electronics parts within power magnetics
cabinet to be completely closed under unfavorable conditions for
improved reliability.
3) The external dimension of AC spindle motor is the same as that of

standard series so that its installation can be performed without
modifying the machine construction.
VI - 1
3. SPECIFICATIONS
Series 380/415 VAC input series
~
I
Continuous
30HV 40HV
rated output 30 37
(*1) (40.2) (49.6)
kW (HP)
Out- Rated Output
put for 30 37 45
power minutes (*1) (49.6) (60.3)
kW (HP)
SO"o ED rated
Output 37 45
(*1, *2) (49.6) (60.3)
kW (HP)
Rota- Base speed 1150 1150
ting Irpm
speed Maximum· speed 4500 4500
I rpm
Out)ut torque N.m 249 306.8
J..o
(*4 (kg.cm) (487) (3130)
0
GD2 kg.m 2
~
e
0 1.49 1.49
Rotor inertia 0.372 0.372
.....Ql
"0
c N.m. sec 2 2 (3.8) (3.8)
..... (kg.cm.sec )
.,""
Weight kg 290 290
~
Vibration V10
Noise 75 dB (A)
Installation Motor should be used so that the output shaft is
horizontal or vertically downward.
Allowable overload 120% of rated output for 30 minutes rating.
capacity (1 min.)
Insulation Class F
Ambient temperature 0 - 40°C
Painting color Munsel system N2.5
Bearing lubrication Grease
30-minute rated 54 63
power capacity kVA
~
..... Power supply (*3,*4) 380/415 VAC, +10%, -15%; 50/60 Hz +1 Hz
c Main circuit Transistor PWM inverter
::l
0
> Feedback Velocity feedback by pulse generator
J..o
.,
Ql
Braking system Regenerative braking
.....Ql Input command +10 VDC (Max. speed) - 0 V (Halt)
"0 voltage
.....c
.,"" Speed control
range
45 - 4500 rpm
(Speed ratio 1:100)
u
< Less than 0.1% of the maximum speed
Speed regulation (at load fluctuation from 10% to 100%)
(*1) The rated output is guaranteed at the rated input voltage (380/415 VAC). If the input
voltage fluctuates, it is possible that the rated output cannot be obtained even when such
functions are within the allowable fluctuation range.
(*4) It is necessary to connect the control power supply (200/220 VAC, +10%, -159-.; 50/60 Hz
+1Hz; single phase) for model 30 HV and 40 HV (power capacity 500 VA).
(*5) ~diator cooling fan is not attached on the servo unit models 30 HV and 40 HV. When using
these units mount the cooler having air flow of 4.5 m3 /min.
VI - 2
Model 30HV
kW 30-min. 50% ED operation zone

40 (37kW)
26kW
Continuous operation zone 22kW
Output 20 (30kW)--+--I
1000 2000 3000 4000 4500 rpm

Motor speed
Model 40 HV
kW
50 30-min. 50% ED operation zone
(45kW)
Output
1000 2000 3000 4000 4500 rpm

Motor speed
VI - 3
5. CONFIGURATION
AC spindle servo unit 380/415 VAC input series consists of followings.
1) Spindle control unit (basic)

2) Fuses (spair) (basic)
3) Connectors (for connection) (basic)
4) DA converter (option)
5) Spindle orientation control circuit (option)
6) Unit cover (option)
7) Fan unit (option)
8) Speed gain switching circuit (option)
9) Power transformer (option) (Used for other than 380/415 VAC input)
Servo unit
r-------, ,-------, (Basic)
I I I
I I
1
1 r-----.l PMC
I I Spindle control unit
I 1 I sequence
I NC control 1 I circuit
I
I unit
1I I
I I
Spindle motor
I 1 L------.J Fuse
I I
I I
IL..... _ _ _ _ _.I
(Option)
r-:==l
L:J Speed gain
Ls_w_i_tc_h_in_g_c_u_rc_u_it-'
Spindle orientation
control circuit
I I
I I
I
Single phase 200/220 V AC · : I
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ___________ ..J I
I
I
I
I
I
3-phase 380/415 VAC I
I
' I
: 460 VAC r---------1...---,
L..---------------------~ Power transformer I
L-----------..J
(Option)
VI - 4
6. CONNECTIONS
6.2 Connection
6.2.1 Connection diagram of power supply for all models
r----------------------~I
380/415 VAC AC spindle servo
I 50/60Hz unit
Circuit breaker R
I
~------------------~!
I
I
~------------------------~
------------------------------------------------------------~JG
4-core cabtyre cable
P"--------------------------, 200/220 VAC

Circuit breaker I 50/60Hz
l-------------------ooof l 220A
220B
,_ ________________________ I
~
I
Servo unit R, S, T and G

220 A and B terminals
terminals
Crimp style
Unit type Applicable terminal size Applicable Crimp style
electric wire R, S, T and G electric wire terminal size
terminals
Model 30HV 30 mm 2 or more

(Heat proof) 2
M8 2 mm M4
2
Model 40HV 38 mm or more
(Heat proof)
6.2.2 Connection diagram between AC spindle servo unit and power magnetics cabinet
VI - 5
6.2.3 Connection between AC spindle servo unit and AC spindle motor
Spindle servo unit AC spindle motor

IeNzi
Overheat signal~ OHI
OHI
(3)
OH2
OH2
~ov (2)
+5 V power -5V ,.... I

-5V
(13) I
supply I
I
I
I
ov I I ov
(J)
f'-' ,~\ PA
Speed feedback (14)
PA II ;
I
signal I\I I
I
RA
RA
(15} t..:.-
I ,-, PB
PB I I '
(161 I
I
I
I
I I I
RB
(17)
RB
ss
_u----- ; I
ss .I
~ (201
~UThlrmo stat
1..! ___ :..~ I
AC spindle
mJ u
z Pulse generator
u
IQ- -
motor
Primary wiring v X
Excitation w v
'\.Y
voltage w Three phases
G G
G
Lff~- 380/415 VAC
fan motor
AC spindle
IFH21 motor
FMU
Voltage for FMU
fan motor 380/415 VAC FMV
FMV
FMW
FMW
VI - 6
Servo unit U, v, Wand G FMU, V, w
terminals
Crimp style
Unit type Applicable terminal size Applicable Crimp style
electric wire u' v' w, and electric wire terminal size
G terminals
2
Model 30HV 30 mm or more
(heat resistance)
M8 2 mm 2 M4
2
Model 40HV 38.mm or more
(heat resistance)
Terminal board screw dimension of motors
Terminals
U, v, w, G FMU- FMW
MlO M4
6.2.4 Connection diagram between AC spindle servo unit and fan unit
VI - 7
7. CAUTIONS
For details which are not listed in this specification, see each item of
Chapter ~I AC SPINDLE SERVO UNIT.
7.1 Difference of Functions and Specifications in Spindle Control Units
1) There is a short-circuit protection function for the control power

supply available. Therefore, turn on power again after turning off AC
input power supply ~emporarily.
2) As auxiliary functions, the software start/stop functions are provided

in all models. For details, see II-7.2.11 "Software start/stop cancel
signal (SOCN)".
7.2 Installation
1) Ambient conditions/input power supply and grounding
Refer to section II-6, after changing the nominal rated voltage to

380/415 VAC.
2) Unit calorific value
Refer to II-5.3 for total calorific value since it is the same as that·
of standard series. Also, the amount of heat radiation from the
exhaust port is approximately 70% of total calorific value.
7.3 Cautions on Mounting
1) Fan motor for cooling units
Fan motors for cooling are not provided on the Models 30HV and 40HV.
Refer to section II-5.6.
2) Air filter
All models are of external heat radiation type. But, perform blast
through an air filter for maintaining life of a fan motor or for
preyenting degradation of heat radiation capacity.
Air filter ••• VILEDON PS/600 (JAPAN Vilene Co., Ltd.)
3) Sealing
When allowing external air to pass through a duct from the blast
port/exhaust port of units, perform sealing between the flange surface
of unit main body and the flange surface of the duct side.
Nitta ept sealer (Nitta Denko)

Width: 10 mm, Thickness: 5 mm
VI - 8
7.4 Interface Signal
7 .4.1 Interface signal specifications
See the items 1), 3), and 4) of section II-7.1.
7 .4.2 Spindle control signal
1) Machine ready signal (MADY 1, 2)
The signal becomes as follows depending on the setting pin S1 on the

PCB and the status of orientation commands ORCM1, ORCM2:
Orientation
Setting
Mode commands Content
S1
ORCM1 , ORCM2
(A) ON .ON Machine ready signal is not used. At this
or time, only the input of emergency stop
OFF signal makes. the spindle motor actuate.
(B) OFF OFF Machine With the contact OFF, the

ready signal motor power is cut off by
is used for the electromagnetic
creating an contactor OFF.
operable
(C) OFF ON status with With the contact OFF, the
double motor power is cut off by
signals. shutting off excitation
signal of transistor at
inverter portion. At this
time, the electromagnetic
contactor stays ON.
The following shows how to use machine ready signal in each mode:
1) Mode (A)
It is used for minimizing the number of input signal points. It is not

required to connect signal wire to contacts.
2) Mode (B) (Standard setting)
a) It is used for controlling operable status with double signals to

provide electromagnetic contactor ON/OFF signal input terminals at
two locations (one is emergency stop signal and the other is machine
preparation completion signal), namely the machine where the
operator touches the spindle with hands for loading/unloading works
and tools.
b) When the contact of the machine ready signal is turned ON, the
electromagnetic contactor is turned ON to actuate the motor.
c) When the contact is turned OFF, the electromagnetic contactor is

cut off the power to a motor.
d) When the contact is turned OFF during motor rotation, the spindle
motor instantaneously decelerates its speed and stops. After that,
the electromagnetic contactor is turned OFF.
VI - 9
3) Mode (C) (Standard setting)
a) In the machine where the spindle motor is restrained by tool unclamp

signal during orientation operation of automatic tool change (ATC),
slight deviation from the orientation stop position increases the
indication of power meter and may cause large amount of motor
current to flow.
b) Turn OFF this signal for energy saving and for preventing the power
meter from reading extremely large value on cases other than cutting
to cancel the orientation status during tool unclamping. The
orientation status can be initiated again by turning on the signal
after termination of tool unclamping.
In the application b) above, if ~he contact of orientation

instruction signal stays on, there is a shift by the amount of
deviation of stop position even if the machine ready signal contact
is turned OFF or ON. There is no orientation with one more
revolution.
VI - 10
VII. SPINDLE ORIENTATION
1. GENERAL
Unlike conventional mechanical spindle orientation using stoppers, etc.,

the electrical spindle orientation stop~ the spindle at a fixed position by
directly feeding back position signals from the position coder or magnetic
sensor directly connected to the machine spindle.
The electrical spindle orientation comprises the following eight types,

which are selectable according to uses.
Type Method Explanation Use
Orientation Position Stops at any - Lathes

A coder method. spindle rotation For spindle positioning
(Stop position point by the (Work- piece loading and
internally setting in the unloading).
specified.) printed circuit - Machining centers
board. For spindle orientation.
- Applicable to the machine
tool of up to 2-stage
speed change system.
Orientation Position The stop pos.i- - Lathes

B coder method. tion, which is Used for spindle
(Stop position set in advance in positioning (Used for
externally the P.C.B can be spindle index at turning
specified. ) changed to any centers, provided that
spindle rotation the spindle is
point by mechanically locked for
inputting a 12 the cutting operation)
bits signal. Used for positioning to
align loading/unloading
direction of workpiece
using the robot.
Orientation Magnetic Stops at a fixed - Machining centers.

c sensor method. position using For spindle orientation.
(Up to 2-stage a non-contacting - Applicable to the machine
speed change position tools of up to 2-stage
gear system) detector. The speed change system.
stop position is - Applicable to the machine
where the tool of which spindle
magnetizing speed is less than
element and the 8,000 rpm.
magnetic sensor
face each other.
VII - 1
Type Method Explanation Use
Orientation Magnetic Same as the - Machining centers.

D sensor method. orientation D. For spindle orientation.
(3-stage speed - Applicable to the machine
change gear tools of 3-stage speed
system) change system.
tool of which spindle
speed is less than
8,000 rpm.
Orientation Position Stops at any - Lathes
E coder method. spindle rotation For spindle positioning
(Stop position point by the (Work- piece loading and
internally setting in the un-loading) •
specified.) printed circuit - Machining centers
board. For spindle orientation.
Orientation Position The stop - Lathes
F coder method. position, which Used for spindle
(Stop position is set in advance positioning (Used for
externally in the P.C.B can spindle index at turning
specified.) be changed to any centers, provided that
spindle rotation the spindle is
point by mechanically locked for
inputting a 12 the cutting operation)
bits signal. Used for positioning to
align loading/unloading
direction of workpiece
using the robot.
Orientation Magnetic Stops at a fixed - Machining centers.
G sensor method. position using For spindle orientation.
(Up to 2-stage a non-contacting - Applicable to the machine
speed change position tools of up to 2-stage
gear system) detector. The speed change system.
stop position is - Applicable to the machine
where the tool of which spindle
magnetizing speed is 6,000 to 12,000
element and the ~·
magnetic sensor
face each other.
Orientation Magnetic Same as the - Machining centers.
H sensor method. above. For spindle orientation.
(up to 2-stage - Applicable to the machine
speed change tools of up to 2-stage
gear system) speed change system.
tool of which spindle
speed is 8,000 to 20,000
rpm.
VII - 2
2. FEATURES
(1) Mechanical parts are not required.

This orientation is accomplished simply by connecting the position coder
or magnetic sensor to the spindle without any need of mechanical
orientation mechanism (stoppers, pins, etc.) for spindle orientation.
(2) Reduction of orientation time

Since the spindle motor connected to the spindle is utilized and the
orientation can be done directly from high-speed rotation, irrespective
of gear shift, the orientation time is largely reduced.
(3) Simplified power magnetic sequence control

This sequence consists of the spindle orientation command, its
completion signal, spindle high/low speed signal and spindle medium
speed signal only without any need of other signals. Neither
orientation speed command sequence nor torque limit command sequence is
needed.
(4) Low price

This simplified orientation control circuit designed for the spindle
orientation only is simplified and low-priced.
(5) High reliability

Electrical system assures improved reliability without any damage to the
mechanical section against an external impact.
(6) High accuracy and rigidity

The spindle orientation accuracy and rigidity are enough to execute
automatic tools exchange (ATC).
(7) Positioning of workpiece

Workpieces can be positioned to arrange their loading and unloading
directions in lathe.
(8) Reduction of the number of processes in boring.

Since the spindle orientation can be done in the same direction as the
rotating direction of the spindle when boring ends, workpieces will not
be damaged by tool blades.
Since these tool blades can be mounted or dismounted in a fixed
direction with reference to workpieces, programming is easy.
VII - 3
3. SPECIFICATIONS
3.1 Position Coder Method
Explanation
No. Item
Stop position Stop position
internal setting external setting
1 Position coder Coupled to the spindle one to one ratio.

1024 pulses/rotation (A-phase and B-phase signals)
1 pulse/rotation (One pulse/rev. signal) Parallel
transmission type for 4,000 rpm, 6,000 rpm or
8,000 rpm.
2 Detection units One spindle rotation (360°) is divided by 1024 x 4

(4096) pulses, i.e. 0.088° is made one pulse unit
(detection unit).
360°/4096 pulses= 0.088°/pulse
3 Stop position The distance between the

point indicated by the
position coder one pulse/
rev. signal and the actu-
al stopping point is set
for the number of pulse
(N) using three digital
switches of 4-bits each.
4 Precision of ±0.2° (spindle angle)

repeated Machine error factors (for example, the backlash of
positionings the coupling between the spindle and position coder)
are excluded. Depending on the fineness of the
position gain adjustment, the spindle may move for
one detection unit length (0.088°) after stopping at
the oriented position.
5 Stop position The stop position can be

external setting specified by the external
12 bits (4096) contact
signal. (M pulses) The
actual stopping point is
the point which is M+N
pulses from the position
indicated by the position
coder one pulse/rev.
signal.
6 Operation When orientation command

is given, spindle rotates
1/2 to 2-1/2 turns after
spindle speed spindle
orientation speed, and
stops at the specified
stop position. No
incremental positioning is
possible.
VII- 4
3.2 Magnetic Sensor Method
Spped change gear system

No. Item
Up to 2-stage speed 3-stage
1 Magnetic sensor See item 5.3 of this chapter.
2 Stop position Stops when the center of the magnetizing

element faces the center of the magnetizing
element or the step position check scale.
The stopping position can be adjusted to a
fineness of ±1° by the circuit.
3 Repeatability ±0.2° or less

Excluding factors from the machine side
errors, such as setting errors.
4 Max. Hold torque at Continuous rated torque of AC spindle motor.

orientating
5 Range where a spindle Orientation stop position ±240°.

can be orientated
6 Circuit c Circuit G Circuit H Circuit D

Allowable High 2000 to 6000 to 8000 to 4000 to
range of max. speed 8000 rpm 12000 rpm 20000 rpm 8000 rpm
spindle speed
(Note 1) Medium - - - 1000 to
speed 2000 rpm
Low 400 to 1200 to 1200 to 250 to

speed 2000 rpm 6000 rpm 6000 rpm 667 rpm
7 Allowable range of
gear ratio
Hi&h s~eed 2 to 5 2 to 5 2 to 5
Low speed
'
Hi&h s~eed
Medium speed,
3 to 4
Medium s~eed
Low speed
(Note 1) If the maximum revolution range of spindle is deviated from the

above ranges in high speed, medium speed, and low speed gear stages,
the spindle orientation time becomes longer, and a trouble may arise
in practice. Observe the above revolution rang~s, accordingly.
VII - 5
4. CONFIGURATION
4.1 Position Coder Type (Stop position internal setting)
r-~-----1 Spindle orientation command

1'.11 9 I
I ~------~
I
I Spindle
I servo unit Gear or belt
I
NC I r-------, CNl
1
I I
1Power magnetic
I
1
r--, sequence r---
1 1 I control circuit 1
I I I ! Spindle
L--------J Tool
;=~=[)
·L----v.J I
CNB:
1
I *
'---------------- ____ .) I
Connected directly to gear

or timing belt (1 : I)
Orientation circuit A (option) Position coder
(Note 1) When a position coder is attached to lathe, etc., it can be

used for this purpose.
(Note 2) The broken line marked with * is the cable route when the
position coder attached to lathe or the position coder for the
synchronous feed for machining center is used concurrently.
4.2 Position Coder Type (Stop position external setting)
r-----,
I
I Orientation circuit B (option)
I
I Spindle
I servo unit
I
NC I
I
r----,
1 Power
Gear or belt
1
I I magnetic 1
L---1 sequence t--
1 I control I
I I ClrCW
· ·t I1
L J L
--L?- -
.
-J 1 Spindle
~ c::::BJzm
I Tool
:
'-------- Position
control I
loop Connected directly to gear
or timing belt (I : 1)
'----+-----
Position coder
Stop position external
command signal
(12-bit binary)
( 4096 = 360°)
VII- 6
4.3 Magnetic Sensor Type
j ~ Spindle orientation command
lI ~ :I .
..------...,
I I Spindle
I I servo unit
I
I
I
I
r-------,I
1 Gear or belt
I
I
I
I
I
I
Power l
1 NC I I magnetic 1
I 1- _ -1 sequence rl __
1 1 I control1
1 1 I circuit
L _____ .J L _______ .J1 : Spindle T 1
Po~hon r~~
control ~
loop :. 'L ~' Magnetizing element
Orientation circuit (option)
Magnetic sensor : ~""" (Directly connected)
.----...J
I
I
I
Magnetic sensor head
'-------~ I
_ _ _ __J
Amplifier
VII - 7
5. OUTER DIMENSIONS
5.1 Outer Dimensions of Option PCB
(1) For MODEL 3 to 40
n n_
u.. I I ~ r
CN9
0
I
~I
0 12:
-
"" -I
....
I "'
c..
I Ill
IU
I~
l
I
CNC CNB CNA 0
,..-
I I I I r I LJ ,_
265
I I
300
(2) For MODEL 1, 2 and small type MODEL 3
-----r
CN9 I
-..,. "'-"'
0
_l
265
I
270 j 54
(1) PCB and fixtures have the same sizes in the position coder system
and magnetic sensor system.
(2) Option PCB are mounted to the PCB of the spindle servo unit before
shipment.
VII - 8
96
U1
N
0
c:
s
~ ~
'"I
30 0
3'
!!
"'6'
:I
s.
"0
~
::+
0
0
s·
:I
0
~~
I I
0
<X)
&
Ih +Cj 14
-~~--= I' 1-'-l~lf_
<
H
H
r,~g (\J
1'-
\0
~ "=..I~
Key
'-
position
L 0 I 36±0. I
Dl60
... I 4-010.2
Cautions for mounting

(1) Since the position coder uses a glass board, do not apply a large
mechanical shock.
(2) To prevent water or oil intrude from the cannon connector, mount the
cannon connector downward.
Figure 5.2 (a) Outer Dimensions of Position Coder A86L-0027-0001#001 (with mounting plate 0 160)
98
-
3. 5
30
.Ot-
~(i 2C
'i''r
I() --
-(S} ~or
t')
-.;t
I 2
§il -!Sl' I
?) 0
I
- 1 - UL
I Pr IX]
-...,. ,-
0
l{)) -f- nr I ~ lSl
(S}~
2111 I . I 5:g·l
0
<
H
I{)
C\J
H
r--
.... 4-05.4 l.
0
t
,,.. D56 .-
-l K"' po,;tla.
MS3102A20-29
,... 068 ....
mechanical shock.
cannon connector downwards.
Figure 5.2 (b) Outer Dimensions of Position Coder AB&L-0027-0001#002 (with mounting plate 0 68)
8- 93
--
30
g!::!~ 2C
'i'~
l()
-- 12
-& ?cr
t')
.q r-
-l5l
8~ - '--IlL
0 0
I
0)
I
I - Pr U)
-\.9 ,-
1
l() - _nr I -~ l5l
l5l~
21~ I . I 5~ ~-··
0
4-M3dep. 7 '--
l()
on 060 C\1
<
H
I'
H
I -
........
l Koy pooltlo
MS3102A20-29
mechanical shock.
cannon connector downward.
Figure 5.2 (c) Outer Dimensions of Position Coder A86L·0027-0001#003 (with mounting plate)
5.3 Magnetic Sensor
5.3.1 Magnetic sensor type
Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor

Items Unit
N p Q R s T
Maximum spindle speed rpm 12,000 rpm 20,000 rpm 15,000 rpm
Magnetizing element 33 14.8 315 460 770 1000

g
weight +1.5 +0.7 +10 +10 +15 +15
- - - - - -
Allowable centrifugal 255 130
kg
force (Note3) (Note3)
Mounting radius from
the spindle center
mm 40 to 110 20 25 30 35
to the magnetizing
(Note3)
element
Gap width from

magnetizing element mm 1. 0 to 2. 0
to sensor (Note 1)
Deviation between the

magnetizing element
mm 0 to +2.0
center and the sensor -
center (Note 2)
Working temperature oc 0 to +50

range
(Note 1) (Note 2)
Magnetizing element Center deviation
(Note 3) When the mounted radius to the magnetizing element is large, maximum
revolution is restricted due to allowable centrifugal force.
(Note 4) It is recommended to mount the magnetizing element using

high-strength bolt.
VII - 12
5.3.2 Magnetizing element outer dimensions
(1) Outer dimension of magnetizing element for magnetic sensor N
SPC
2.0t
Cover O.St
Fixing hole SPC

4-4.3 dia. Marking hole 1.0 dia.
2.0 t
Cover O.St
Cover O.St
1 - - - - - 50 ---..j
Unit: mm
Weight: 33g ± 1.Sg (Be careful with the balance of spindle)
(2) Outer dimension of magnetizing element for magnetic sensor P
2-¢4.3
Stainless cover (t 0.8)
Mounting plate ( Chromating t 1.6)
50
Name plate (t 0.1)
VII - 13
(3) Outer dimensions of magnetizing element for magnetic sensor Q
RING FEDER
RFN 8006 40 X 45 4-M4
Stainless steel
SUS-303
Stop position
check scale 2-4!5 ±0.15
on ~54 circumference
(4) · Outer dimensions of magnetizing element for magnetic sensor R
RING FEDER
RFN8006 50X57 4-MS
Stainless steel
SUS-303
1!2
~0
+I "'"'
t-o 19-
19-
:I:
,.,
0
19-
2-4!5 ±0.15
Stop position on ~79 circumference
check scale
VII - 14
(5) Outer dimensions of magnetizing element for magnetic sensor S
RINGFEDER
RFN8006 60X68 4-MS
Stainless steel
SUS-303
~
....
0'>
eso
+I 0'>
c-
c-
""' ::c /
/ ""'
~
""'
Stop position 2-f!5 ±0.15

check scale \on IP54 circumference
(6) Outer dimensions of magnetizing element for magnetic sensor T
28 RINGFEDER
RFN8006 70X79 4 -M6
Stainless steel
SUS-303
0
~0
:::"' +-I
c-
0
0'>
""' ::c
0
""'
c-
""'
Stop position
check scale 2-f!5 ±0.15
on IP90 circumference
VII - 15
CJI
w
w
Avii!W Metallic receptacle

f
:::t.
n
interface I
..
8
..~
a.
Metallic receptacle (7 cores) §"
.
!!
~-
~~etlc sensor head j IAmplifier 1

<
H Magnetizing element move direction 2-5.4 dia.
H
I Metallic receptacle
....
0\ ' _A_ 20.0 dia.
MAGNETIC SENSOR
(uf...57L_--oool=O·o3i ]
1--------- 9 5
Units: mm
5.3.4 Cautions in use
(1) A ringfeder is used inside the magnetizing element. Tighten four bolts
evenly and securely.
(!)
Tighten bolts gradually and
repeatedly in the order of
<D through @ .
(2) The relation between the decision standard hole and the magnetic polarity
is as illustrated below.
· Marking
(3) Utilize the screw fixing holes of magnetic sensors Q, R, S, T and two
.SS .0 holes on the opposite side faces for the orientation positioning
jig.
VII - 17
~~
....
Spindle servo unit 0
CN I ::s 0
sz
~z
MR-50RMA
CNI 111 m
' .--1
2 0
NC or Power KS '11-
magnetic
sequence control
--
..,0 0z
"'D c
0 -
MR-50LFII ~)>
g-· :xJG)
I 8 )>
MR-20LI\tH a..s::
~~1,---------------~---------------lI
CD
~
To power magnetic .
sequence control CNA, CNB CNC Oriented spindle stop control circmt
.1 zo 19 18 1 11 16 15 14 .
<:
H Kll CNB r~ 00 *PB PB lI
*PA PA *SC SC
p
H
ToNC-------- J 1 13 12 I 11 10 09 08
.... MR- 20LFH I )<J I I X NZZ I NZX HB HA
00
I
I
07
+12N +5H
06 05
+5H I
I 04
+5H
03
OH
02
OH
01
OH H06 1105 H04 H03 H02 H01 _j'
L-----------------------------------~ -
MR-20RMA(CNA, B)
I
I
Machine Gear or belt
To manual pulse-generator I
To proximity switch for near zero point I
KIO ~ I Tool
(Note 1) Signal cable K 12 is used with the orientation B circuit.

Position coder
; : - Spiodle ~ cqj:Pm
(Note 2) Cable K11 is used when the lathe position coder or the synchronous
Directly
t' . ·
coupled or
feed position coder for the machining center is used concurrently.
tmtng belt
6.1.1 Connection when synchronous feed position coder is concurrently used for lathes and machining centers
---------------~
Oriented spindle @EJ I
~HA
stop control
circuit A/B ~
- 5
0L
~HB (09)
I
F ---::l 6
~ Do
To
+5V
-~
(0 1)(0 2)(0 3). OH
, ..... 4 H +12N
I Ope:r IT+5V I
Manual
pulse
0
J
<? 5H (04)(05)(06 ~
+5H
-- ...,I ~;
I
r-..: 3 generator
+SV power is I I
supplied fromNC I I
I I
I
I I I
I
I Proximity switch
I I for near zero point
I I
To NC via (10) ~ I
connectorCNB
NZX
-- A
-,
L
I I
I I I
I I I
I
I I ~ I
(11) I I
NZZ - ~--
~
I I I
I I
I I
I I I I
I I
I
I I I I
I I I I
I I
(07)
+12N
I
I
l
I
I
--1
I
I
I
-'-+~~ r-- • ..I
I (Note) When the manual pulse

I
(20) generator and the proximity
OG - I
6OG I
I
switch for near zero point
are not used, HA, HB, NZX,
I NZZ and +12N need not be
j_OV I
.,. Sh1eld groundmg I
connected.
I
I
I
I
I
I
L:: ..... K(OV)
L!: ..... H(+5V)
4,000 rpm (16) ~-~-----------~

PA A(PA)
-.~\
I I
6,000 rpm I I
Position coder 17 I I
*PA N(*PA)
signal input I I
I I I
(18)
PB
I I A I ! C(PB)
I i
1\
I
I I
I
Posit on
I I : I
(19)
*PB RC *PB) coder
I I I I
I
I I I
I
(14) A B\SC)
sc I
(15)
*SC
I
I
I
: 7\
'-L.--------------~
I
I I
I
I
P ( *SC)
VII - 19
6.1.2 Connection for machining center spindle orientation only
Oriented ~pindle stop contr~l circuit I

+SV is
+5V I CNA I I
supplied by +5V (01 )(02 )(03

the spindle
1 servo unit.
Jumper.
OH
----------- K (OV)
400mA
or less
5H (04)(05)(06
(20
+5H
OG .......
-· ,..;;: H (+5V)
Position coder
OG
ov
t~Jumper
""'-"""
Position coder ( 16 ) PA -.---------.,.... A\PAJ
U\
signal input I
I I
I I
( 1i ) I I
*PA N(*PA)
T I
I
I
I
( 18 ) I A I
PB C(PB)
+ J\
I I
I I
I
( 19 ) I
*PB I
R ( *PB)
I
I I
( 14 ) sc I A : BC SC J
I ( l 5) *SC ~
I
I
U\ :
L_
\
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _.J.. PC*SC)
I
__j
(Note) The cable between the servo unit and the position coder must not
exceed 20 meters.
VII - 20
6.1.3 Stop position external setting connection
Oriented spindle stop control circuit

.
Setting +5V
I CNA I
by solderl?!!" ~ 0 1 )( 0 2 ( 0 3 ) OH K ( 0 v)
rolt- 5 v
I,__ _ _ , I 400mA
or less
i L_ ~H(o4)(05)(06) H ( +5V)
+5H -
(20) Posi~ion coder
----~,---.--------------~ OG -
:
1..-~
f' 100
I
~ov
Position coder ( 16 )
PA . ..-+--------~
I I
A(PA)
-+ ~\
signal input I I
I I
: 17 ) I
*PA NC*PA)
I I
I I
( 18 )
PB
I A :
I
C ( Pl:l)
V\
I I
I
( 19 ) I
I
*PB ---+--
I
I
I
R(*PB)
I I
( 14 ) I I
sc A B(SC)
When the synchronous feed control

( 15 )
*SC -t" :V\------ __ :
'• \
__,_
PC*SC)
is performed, these signals are sent
to NC via the connector CNB.
Short circuit +SV -SH, and OG -OV 1
to supply +SV from NC
CNC I I( 0 7 ) H01
:----. __! 20 Power
H02
magnetic
(06 ) 2 21 sequence
control circuit
(05 Jl H03 4
22 Conversion
circuit
', 0 4 ) H04 8 4096
23
Stop position =360°
command signal _(0 3) H05 16 2048
2~
=I 80°
(02 ) HOG 32 I024
25
I -= 9 0 °
( 20 ) HO 7 64 26 5I2
-~ 4 5°
l 19 ) H08 128 27 341
=30°
( 18 ) H09 2 56
2'
( 17 ) H1 o 51 2 29
I
I ( 16 ) H1 1 1024 210
L __ -
_(ls l
\ 14 )
H12
OL
2048
2"
Stop position command~
VII - 21
en
MR-50RMA
I Spindle servo--;;.tit
-331 I N
CNl ~
NC or power
magnetic
KS 0 it
~
.-.
'T1
sequence control / ...0
MR-50LFH 3
c!:I
~
(;'
CN9 ~
:I
r---------------~------------------·
a
~
I
1 Oriented spindle stop control circuit
~' II
20 19 I8 17 16 I5 I4
~ MR- 20RMA
H CNA \ 00 ov +15V LSB LSA MSB MSA
H
13 12 11 10 09 08
N
/ I IX
-
I
I
X
J
N
07 06 05 04 03 02 01
~~LFH ·~:1
I I I I I I I i
L-------------------~---------------j
- - - - - - -
Machine side Gear or belt
Tool
~
Metallic receptacle ~
K13
~ Magnetic sensor
Amplifier
------
6.2.1 Magnetic sensor connection
O~on-n oontrol ci<oui~l

et c connector
Malli
~.I
-------,....
~MSA
,.... A
I I
I I
I I
~MSB
I I
I I
--- ----.lo..' D
~LSA I
--------,.....
I
I
F
Magnetic
sensor
I I amplifier
~LSB
I I
I I
E
-~(1~8)_.()
I
+1 5v J___ -----~=
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
c
_....:a:.::..9_.oov - __._,
I
sr
I I
B
L__
(1) The cable between the servo unit and the magnetic sensor amplifier
must not exceed 20 meters.
VII - 23
7. SIGNALS
7.1 Description of Signals (In case of up to 2-stage speed change gear spindle)
I"""'VOUDit- I CNI-,l
1
~ Orientation command
ORCM 1 ---1 -------,
r- -----------------,
I ( 17) I :
Spindle High/Low
l_J ___ _I!_C2s) -?--<:_T_H_- ----~---~ speed signals
~ ORCM2
Orientation
completion signal ( 2 2 ) I
~
ORARl
ORAR2
L __
Fig. 7.1 Signals passed between the magnetic cabinet or NC and the spindle servo unit
VII - 24
7 .1.1 Orientation command signal (ORCM1, 2)
(1) This command signal is used to stop spindle movement to the preset
position to allow tool change and workpiece loading/unloading.
(2) When this signal is input while the spindle is rotating, the rotation
decelerates immediately and the spindle moves to the preset position.
(3) When the ORCM command is issued, turn off the spindle forward/reverse
rotation command (SFR, SRV) for safety. In this status, the spindle will
not rotate if ORCMl, 2 contact is opened during orientation.
(4) Turn off this signal by the tool change completion signal or workpiece
loading/unloading completion signal.
(5) Always set the orientation command signal to OFF when turning on power.
Sequence
ON
Power on ~~
Spindle servo on "" .----- ON- - - - -
(machine ready signal ___O_F_F_ _....~I \
and emergency stop
signal)
r--------
Orientation
command ORCM ----------J
40 ms or more
(6) When an emergency stop occurs during orientation, the orientation command
signal must be reset. Return the ATC arm to safe position so that it
will not be damaged i f the spindle or tool rotates when the power is
turned on.
VII - 25
7.1.2 Orientation completion signal (ORAR1, 2)
(1) This signal is issued when the spindle moves within about ±1 ° of the
preset position and stops. That is, this signal turns on under the
following three conditions;
(a) Signal ORCM is ON
(b) Zero speed signal is ON
(c) The spindle is in the vicinity of the preset position.
(2) If the orientation completion signal is not issued within a set period of
time after the orientation command signal is input or if the orientation
completion signal is issued when the orientation command signal has not
been input, it is considered to be abnormal. So it should be detected by
power magnetic sequence and an orientation alarm should be issued.
(3) Tool change or workpiece loading/unloading operations can be started only

after the completion signal is on.
(4) The spindle orie~tation completion signal is issued when the spindle is
within ±1° of the preset position. So it does not always indicate that
the spindle has stopped completely. Some machine allow a very short
operation time for the ATC arm to grip the spindle tool. In this case,
start the ATC arm operation after 0.1 to 0. 5 sec so that the arm will
grip the tool when the spindle has stopped completely.
Zero-speed detection point
Orientation
completion signal
Chattering
ATC arm operation

start signal
0.1- 0.5 sec
(5) This signal will turn off during a tool change if the spindle is pushed
away from the preset position by an external force.
Design a power magnetic sequence so that the tool change operation is
interrupted.
However, don't release orientation command, and if orientation completion
signal is issued again, perform tool change.
(6) If the automatic tool change (ATC) structure is such that it may cause
serious damage if a malfunction occurs, install a proximity switch to
generate a verification signal when the ATC enters an area in which
automatic tool change operation can be performed. In addition to this
the power magnetic sequence should be designed to avoid such damage.
VII - 26
7.1.3 Spindle high/low speed signal (CTHI
(1) This signal is used to reduce the orientation time when two gears are
used between the spindle and the spindle control.
(2) Increase the spindle motor speed in the low-speed gear by the high/low
ratio so that the spindle orientation time is approximately the same for
both gears.
(3) The contact is open when the high-speed gear has been selected, and
closed when the low gear is in use.
(4) Both position coder and magnetic sensor methods are used for the machine
with spindle change of 2-stage or less.
VII - 27
7.2 Description of Signals (In case of 3-stage speed change gear spindle)
The magnetic sensor system spindle orientation (A06B-6041-J121)

comprises the following spindle medium speed signal.
!SPindle se~~ ~~t - ~

! (2 S) ORCMl ---' Orientation command
I :j---,j( 24 )~-CTM----~---l Spindle medium speed
_ _;
signal
lL~~:l~:~~;-·-=::
Spindle high/low speed
i signal
I "'F"
I Orientation
, completion signal .( 2 2 )
~1
I ~23 ORARl ~
I ( ) ORAR2
L ____ _
Signals between power magnetic control (or NC) and spindle servo unit
7.2.1 Spindle medium speed signal (CTM)
(1) This signal is combined with spindle high speed/low speed signal (CTH)
to reduce the spindle orientation time when the speed change gear stages
between the spindle and the motor consist of 3 stages; high, medium, and
low stages.
(2) Assume the following machine as an example.
Speed change gear Spindle speed Motor speed Gear ratio
High gear 4500 rpm 4500 rpm 1
Medium gear 1500 rpm 4500 rpm 1/3
Low gear 500 rpm 4500 rpm 1/9
.When the orientation command is given, the motor revolutions are set to
3 times in the medium gear and 9 times in the low gear during spindle
orientation, if the motor revolutions are assumed as 1 in the high gear
stage. In other words, the operation time is kept almost constant,
irrespective of each speed gear stage, by keeping the spindle
revolutions constant.
(3) Control the contact signals according to each speed change gear stage as
follows.
Selection of spindle speed CTH signal contact CTM signal contact

change gear stage
High speed gear stage OFF (open) OFF (open)
Medium speed gear stage OFF (open) ON (closed)
Low speed gear stage ON (closed) OFF (open)
VII - 28
7.3 Sequences
7 .3. 1 Orientation command issued while stopping

Orientation command ON (Closed)
ORCMI, 2
CW direction Stop
Motor speed
-----------r~~~----~~~-----------------r--~--
/
CCW di~e~t~~//
15-20 ms
Orientation completion
signal ORARl and 2. ON (Closed)
ATC operation
ATC operation
Completion
Note 1: The spindle motor rotation direction can be changed by setting. In

standard setting, the spindle motor will rotate in the direction the
spindle motor was rotating before this orientation conunand signal
was generated.
VII - 29
7 .3.2 Orientation command issued during high-speed rotation
Rotation command
SFR and SRV
M03/M04
Orientation command
ORCMl and 2 ON (Close)
High speed
---,,....,.
CW direction
Stop
,
"-----
Motor speed
/
15- 20ms'
Orientation / "
CCW dire_ptJ.o.!l_./ ON (Closed)
completion
signal ORARl
and2
ATC operation
Stop Completion
VII - 30
7.4 Description of Signals (In case of stop position external setting type, position coder system)
(In case of A06B-6041-J111)
7.4.1 Orientation command signals (H01 to H12-0L)
(1) These 12-bit contact signals are used to control the stop position.
(2) When these signals are all OFF (open), the spindle is stopped at the
reference stop position (0°).
This reference stop position can be set by using 3 digital switches on
PCB.
(3) Stop position command
The following stop positions (X 0) are designated according to ON/OFF
conditions of H01 to H12 contact signals with reference to the reference
stop position (0°).
360 [ 1 2 4 8 16 32 64
X(degree) = 4095 (H01)+(H02)+(H03)+(H04)+(H05)+(H06)+(H07)
128 256 512 1024 2048

+(H08)+(H09)+(H10)+(H11)+(H12)
J
The numbers corresponding to H01 to 1U2 become effective when contacts
are turned on and those corresponding to H01 to H12 become zero when
contacts are turned off.
(Example) H10 contact only is turned on.

360/4095 X 512 = 45°
In this case, the spindle stops at the position where it is turned
clockwise by 45° as viewed from the reference stop position.
(4) The minimum shift unit is 360°/4095 = 0.088°.

(5) Positioning time
The positioning time is usually 1.4 to 20 sec when the speed change gear
stages are 2 or less.
It becomes longer as the spindle inertia increases.
(6)· Setting error

Since the position is set to 'integer times of the m1.n1.mum shift unit
(0.088°) in case of 30° indexing, 10° indexing, and 1° indexing, a
setting error is produced.
Setting error Max. ±0.044°

(Example)
30° indexing command (Min. shift unit) X 341 = 29.974° (Error - 0.026°)
10° indexing command (Min. shift unit) x 114 = 10.020° (Error + 0.020°)
10 indexing command (Min. shift unit) x 11 0.967° (Error - 0.033°)
To determine actual accuracy, a setting error is added to the repetition

positioning accuracy (±0.2°)
(7) Necessity of mechanical clamp

A mechanical clamp is required for indexing of the spindle for cutting
using this system.
Since the motor is. displaced when load fluctuates during cutting, the
spindle must be mechanically fixed, if cutting is made after indexing.
VII - 31
(8) Mechanical clamp timing
Orientation command
ORCMl, 2 ON (Closed)
Spindle motor
speed
Orientation
completion signal
ORAR1,2
MF (Miscellaneous function)
Machine clamp
0.1 - 0.5 sec. usually

Cutting after (This value depends Cutting
indexing of spindle upon machine tool)
Completion signal
FIN ------~r-1~--------~r-l~---
VII - 32
8. DETECTOR SPECIFICATIONS
8.1 Position Coder
Position coder signals PA, PB

The position coder emits square wave voltage signals in numbers
proportionate to the spindle rotation angle, and must be attached to the
spindle one to one gear ratio for fixed position stop usage.
(1) Kind and specification
A86L-0027-0001#D0
Mounting plate
1: With mounting plate o 160
2: With mounting plate o 68
3: Without mounting plate
Max. speed
1: 4000 rpm
0: 6000 rpm
2: 8000 rpm
The following lists the position coder electrical and mechanical
specifications.
(2) Electrical specifications
(a) Number of square waves/rotation
Channel Signal
1 ch 1,024 pulses/rotatiOJl (A, B phase)
2 ch 1 pulse/rotation (C phase)
(b) Power supply
Voltage Current
+SV, + 5%, -10% 400 mA or less
(c) Working ambient temperature range

0 to 50°C
(d) Output terminal

• Cannon connector MS3102A20-29P} Position coder side
• Cannon connector MS3106B20-29S} Cable side
• Cable damp MS3057-12A
The cable side cannon connector and the cable clamp are provided
with the position coder.
VII - 33
(3) Mechanical specifications
-3 2
(a) Input axis inertia 1 x 10 kg.cm.s or less
(b) Input axis torque 1,000 g.cm or less

at start
(c) Input axis load tolerance
-------------
Thrust load
When stopped
10 kg or less
During operation
5 kg or less
Radial load 20 kg or less 10 kg or less

(d) Structure
Dust-proof and oil-proof structure. (IP43)
(e) Weight About 1 kg (Without mounting plate)
(4) Storage
Store the position coder at a place free from moisture.
Also when transf~rring the product, always put it in a package and do not
drop or throw down it.
(5) Notes on installation
(a) If there is baacklash in the interface between the position coder

and the spindle, the stop position will vary. Therefore, the
position coder should be linked to the spindle so as to eliminate
backlash. If the position coder is installed with a timing be~t or
a gear, check periodically for backlash due to mechanical wear.
(b) Deviation of the center of axis between the body of position coder
and the shaft shall be 0.02 mm or less.
(c) Since the position coder uses a glass plate, do not apply a large
mechanical shock.
Also, to prevent water or oil intrude from the cannon connector,
mount the cannon connector downward.
(d) The position coder shall be apart from the magnetic cabinet more
than 50 em.
Apart from a cable in which a large instantaneous current flows when
the motor turns ON and OFF more than 30 em.
Especially, when a machine such as electric discharge machine,
electric welding machine which generates a radiation noise is near
the position coder, make an electric shelding.
VII - 34
8.2 Magnetic Sensor
The magnetic sensor makes sure that the spindle stops at the specified
position by attaching a magnetizing element to the spindle rotation part and
installing a magnetic sensor at the stop position.
The magnetic sensor emits analog signals corresponding to the position of
the magnetizing element attached to the spindle.
Control circuit
Magnetic sensor
amplifier
Magnetic
sensor ~
+lSV lOOrnA
or less 1----1 ,~
Mangetizing
element
A shielded wire should be used. Shield insulation must be connected to

OG. The following shows the magnetic sensor electrical specifications and how
to attach the sensor.
(1) Electrical specifications
(a) Number of waves per rotation

Channel Number of waves per rotation
1 ch 1/rotation (MSA-MSB)
2 ch 1/rotation (LSA-LSB)
(b) Power supply
+15V, +10%, -10%, lOOmA or less
(c) Maximum number of rotation (Magnetizing element) 8,000 rpm
(d) Working ambient temperature range (Magnetic sensor)
(e) Output terminal

Metallic receptacle type. Receptacles for the cable of the magnetic
sensor amplifier are provided.
VII - 35
(f) Output terminal layout (Magnetic sensor amplifier)
Terminal Contents
A MSA
B ov
c +lSV
D MSB
E LSB
F LSA
(g) Weight of magnetizing element 33 g :!:: 1. 5 g
VII - 36
(2) ~~gnetic sensor mounting method
The followings show magnetic sensor mounting examples.
Spindle (Rotating part)
Mounting distance
H(mm)
60 to 110 mm
Mounting board
(Thickness 8 mm
or less)
Magnetic sensor
Metallic receptacle
20.0 dia.
Amplifier
0 0
Fig. 8.2 (a) Magnetic sensor mounting example (1)
VII - 37
Mounting distance H
60-llOmm
I
Spindle (Rotating part)
0
I
Magnetic
sensor
Mounting board
(Thickness
8 mm or less)
l!.L = 1.0 to 2.0mm
L = 8mm or less
(6mm: Standard
value)
Note) Gap between mounting board and magnetizing element is 8 mm or more.
Fig. 8.2 (b) Magnetic .sensor mounting example (2) (When mounted on cylinder)
Magnetic sensor
L= 1 to 2mm
Magnetizing element
Inside wall
(Be careful not to
adhere iron dust
on this part)
Fig. 8.2 (c) Magnetic sensor mounting example (3) (When mounted on disk)
VII - 38
Mounting method of magnetic sensor
Magnetizing element
polarity indication
Stop position check
scale Mounting board
(Plate thickness: Less than 8mm)
Magnetic sensor head ~ 36
Metallic receptacle IP20
> Amplifier
en
~
~
I
0
0 0
-
0
0
0
0
I
c.>
~
Fig. 8.2 (d) Magnetic sensor Q, R, SandT mounting example (4)
VII - 39
(a) Magnetic sensor head pin groove
When a magnetizing element is mounted to the spindle of a machine tool,

the polarity is produced between the magnetic element and the magnetic sensor,
and the mounting direction differs according to the composition of the spindle
(belt transmission, gear coupling, et~.)
For the connection shown in the magnetic sensor interface, arrange the
relative positions of the magnetizing element marking hole and pin groove of
the magnetic sensor as illustrated below.
If this mounting is wrong~ the spindle motor will repeatedly turn 'in the
forward and reverse directions without being stopped.
Magnetizing element
Magnetic sensor marking hole
head pin groove
Rotating
direction
The spindle motor rotates counterclockwise (CCW) as viewed from the motor
shaft by forward rotation command (signal SFR contact ON (closed), speed
command VCMD (positive voltage).
Arrange the magnetizing element marking hole and the magnetic sensor pin
hole face to face, so that the spindle motor rotates in the rotating direction
specified in the figure.
(Installation example 1) (Installation example 2)
Magnetiziq element
markin& hole Magnetic sensor Magnetizing element
Forward rotation marking hole
Maanetic sensor SPINDLE command
~
SFR on (closed)
MOTOR
Gear linkage
Counterclockwise
SPINDLE
MOTOR
Counterclockwise
~
<-::> Clockwise
Oockwise
VII - 40
Magnetizing element Magnetizing element

marking hole marking hole
~
Magnetic sensor
pin groove
Gear linkage ~ MagnetiC sensor
pin groove
~
Counterclockwise
C"")
Counterclockwise
Counterclockwise
Screw fixinc Screw fixing

Polarity direction Mqnetizinl direction Magnetic
indication element element
AC SPINDLE
MOTOR
pin groove
Counterclockwise
Gear linkage
Counterclockwise Counterclockwise
VII - 41
(3) Cautions on installation
(a) Since the magnetizing element is mounted onto the rotating body of
the spindle, be careful not tc allow the magnetizing element to be
detached by means of centrifugal force.
Limit the circumferential speed of the magnetizing element to lower
than 3770 m/min.
(Take the depth of the screw holes of M4 x 4 into consideration)
(b) Mount the sensor amplifier as close to the sensor as possible (cable
length 500 mm)
(c) Don't allow a magnetic field producing substance to be close to the

magnetic sensor, otherwise the orientation accuracy fluctuates.
Don't arrange any solenoid in the vicinity of the magnetizing
element, in particular.
(d) Be careful not to attach iron powder and other substances sensjble
to the magnetism to the magnetizing element.
(e) If the spindle is provided with a built-in electromagnetic clutch

for HIGH/LOW selection and other parts which may compose a magnetic
loop, mount the magnetizing element on a non-magnetic substance
(aluminum, etc.) without fail.
The magnetic flux of the magnetizing element is zero at the stop
position. However, if it is affected by a magnetic loop of the
electromagnetic clutch, the magnetic flux is added normally when the
magnetic clutch is turned on. It should be carefully noted that if
the clutch is turned on and off during the stop at the fixed
position, the stop position changes due to a change of the
steady-state magnetic flux.
(f) Don't contaminate the magnetic sensor cable, sensor amplifier, and
connecting cables with lubrication oil and cutting oil.
(g) Mount the magnetizing element of the magnetic sensor onto the
spindle directly.
If the magnetizing element is mounted by gear coupling or spindle
coupling, the repetition orientation accuracy may fluctuate by a
backlash quantity between the spindle and the magnetizing element.
Examine this accuracy by taking a change due to a secular change
caused by mechanical abrasion, etc. into consideration.
VII - 42
9. TWO MAGNETIC SENSORS ORIENTATION
9.1 General
According to this technical data, a spindle can be selectively stopped at

two different orientated positions by two magnetic sensors.
9.2 Configuration
Spindle motor
Power line, signal line

Spindle servo unit
Spindle
Orientation -
circuit
~ ll
~~~~~~------+-~
CNl CNA
Cable C
I
Magnetic sensor A
Cable A I I I Ill
Switching~-+------------1 I
circuit 1----J----------, I...___...,~ .___
Cable B Magnetizing element
I
Power magnetic sequence I
control circuit
Magnetic sensor B
(Note)
NC 1. Switching circuit at power magnetic
sequence control circuit to select a
magnetic sensor signal shall be prepared by
user.
2. 2 or more magnetic sensors are necessary.
Magnetic sensor specification A57L-0001-0037/( )
VII - 43
9.3 Change-over Circuit
The change-over circuit is shown in Fig. 9.3.2. (b)

The MSA, LSA and +15V signals of the magnetic sensor A and B are
transferred to the orientation circuit by shifting them within a change-over
circuit.
9.3.1 Selection signal of magnetic sensor (SB signal in the drawing)
When the SB signal is set at HIGH LEVEL, the magnetic signal A is

selected. vlhen set at LOW LEVEL, the magnetic sensor B is selected by
actuating the relay.
The power +V supplies voltage to the relay solenoid. For changing
timing, select the magnetic sensor so that it may be completed before turning
ON the orientation command as in the figure below.
Orientation command
-rr I
t .;;; 0 msec
~0-N-(-cl_o_se_d_c_o_n-tact)
(ORCM) --------------~--~
Selection signal of
--------------)<~---------------
magnetic sensor
(SB)
L Magnetic sensor
selecting completed
Fig. 9.3.1 Timing chart to select magnetic sensor
9.3.2 Signal change-over relay
(1) Contacting point type
Contacting points for two circuits are switching simultaneously with a

single operation coil and contacting point between 1 and 2 (or point 3
and 4) may not be shorted out.
r-------------,
I I
Note 1) Numbers are given
for convenience.
Note 2) The SH terminal is 8
used for shielding I 02
I
statics. SHO -----~------.,
I I
' 3
7 I
:o 04
I
. . _--- I
--~-- ----.J
'
'
I
6 5
Fig. 9.3.2 (a)
(2) Contact resistance 100 mQ or less

(3) Capacity of contacting point 1VA or greater
(4) Switching life of contacting point Select according to the actual
frequency of use.
VII - 44
Switching circuit MSA Cable A
Spindle servo unit
Magnetic
MSB sensor A
LSA
Relay
r-----,I
I
LSB I
I ---r-J
I I
- +15V Shield
Orientation
MSA
: : o+-
I I
I
1
circuit MSB 1- L---i---1 ,....--- ov
I I '"' I
c NA Cable C !----- ~ I I ___ JI
LSA - 00
-
____ "'" ____ ~
I
I
I
I
I
I \...i'"i-
I
I
1...--l--~
-LSB h
+15V MSA
- ov Cable B
Magnetic
r-- MSB
Shield
----
- 00 1- LSA
sensor B
~--.-.:.._,L....-- LSB I
kYYol
I
,...,
I ()
--.,.-J I
I +15V l Shield
l...--:--.J
I
I
I
I
I ov '
I
I I
I ___ JI
I 00
Diodo I'
+V I
~ '
'
Trower
Magnetic sensor select signal

+V
~!"-
SB 1'- Relay coil
6 Common line
+
SH
Electrostatic shield
0
Fig. 9.3.2 Ib) Switching circuit interface
Note: Internal wiring of circuit should be as short as possible.
9.4 Fine Adjustment for Stop Position
In two-magnetic sensors type, design on machine side is required to

enable fine adjustment for the other side stop position since fine adjustment
for stop position can be done at only one side.
VII - 45
10. ORDER SPECIFICATION
(1) Orientation circuit
Name Specification No. Remarks (PCB No.)
Orientation AS (Note 1)
(Position coder type, 2-stage A06B-6052-Jll0 A20B-0008-0240
speed change gear spindle)
Orientation BS (Note 1)
(Position coder type, 2-stage A06B-6052-Jll1 A20B-0008-0241
speed change gear spindle)
Orientation CS (Note 1)
(Magnetic sensor type, 2-stage A06B-6052-Jl20 A20B-0008-0030
speed change gear spindle,
spindle speed: less than 8,000rpm)
Orientation GS (Note 1)
speed change gear spindle,
Orientation HS (Note 1)
speed change gear spindle, +A06B-6044-J948
Orientation A
(Position coder type, A06B-6041-Jl10 A20B-0008-0240
2-stage speed change gear spindle)
Orientation B
(Position coder type, A06B-6041-J 111 A20B-0008-0241
Orientation C
(Magnetic sensor type, A06B-6041-Jl20 A20B-0008-0030
2-stage speed change gear spindle
spin4le speed: less than 8,000rpm)
Orientation D
(Magnetic sensor type, A06B-6041-Jl21 A20B-0009-0520
Orientation E
(Position coder type, A06B-6041-Jl30 A20B-1000-0460
Orientation F
(Position coder type, A06B-6041-J131 A20B-1000-0461
(Note 1) These functions are available for models 1, 2 and small type model 3.
VII - 46
Name Specification No. Remarks(PCB No.)
Orientation G
(Magnetic sensor type, A06B-6041-J122 A20B-0008-0031
spindle speed: less than 12,000 rpm)
Orientation H A20B-0008-0031
(Magnetic sensor type, 2-stage A06B-6041-J123 +A06B-6044-J948
speed change gear spindle
(2) Magnetic sensor
Name Specification No. Remarks
Magnetic sensor N This specification No. is also

Spindle revolutions A57L-0001-0037/N applicable when /N is not
12,000rpm or lower specified.
Magnetic sensor P
Spindle revolutions A57L-0001-0037/P Compact type
12,000rpm or lower
Magnetic sensor Q ~40 ID cylindrical high-speed

Spindle revolutions A57L-0001-0037/Q type
20,000rpm or lower
Magnetic sensor R ~50 ID cylindrical high-speed

Spindle revolutions A57L-0001-0037/R type
20,000rpm or lower
Magnetic sensor S ~60 ID cylindrical high-speed

Spindle revolutions A57L-0001-0037/S type
15,000rpm or lower
Magnetic sensor T ~70 ID cylindrical high-speed

Spindle revolutions A57L-0001-0037/T type
_15,000rpm or lower
(3) Position coder
Name Specification No. Remarks
Position coder c A86L-0027-0001#101

Parallel transimission type
(4,000 rpm) with 160 flange
Position coder D Parallel transimission type
(6,000 rpm) A86L-0027-0001#001
with 160 flange
Position coder E Parallel transmission type
(4,000 rpm) A86L-0027-0001#103
without frange
Position coder F Parallel transmission type

(6,000 rpm) A86L-0027-0001#003
without frange
VII - 47
VIII. SPINDLE SELECTOR CONTROL
1. INTRODUCTION
In spindle selector control there are two main spindle motors which are
not driven simultaneously. A printed-circuit board for main spindle selector
control circuit is added and modified to one AC spindle servo unit. Also,
units such as an electromagnetic contactor are provided for selecting power
lines outside the servo unit. Two motors with the same characteristics or
those with different output characteristics are changed over for a controlling
drive. It has the following applications:
(1) In turning centers, the main spindle motor for main turning and the sub
spindle motor for rotary tool are used by changing over the signal lines
for power line and speed feedback and for orientation with one spindle
unit.
(2) In five-surface working machines, the vertical main spindle motor and the
horizontal main spindle motor are used by changing over the power
line/speed feedback signal line and the orientation signal line with one
spindle unit.
2. CONFIGURATION
2.1 Configuration
To control 2 AC spindle motors using 1 servo unit followings are

required:
- Spindle selector control circuit

- Magnetic contactor for selector
- Selector signal from magnetics sequence
Configuration of spindle selector control is shown below.
Spindle selector
control circuit
NC Magnetic
Selecting signal
,..-----., contactor Sensor for
PMC orientation
AC spindle servo unit
Sensor for
orientation
VIII - 1
2.2 Order Specifications
Always order both of unit and selector control specifications.
(1) AC spindle servo unit
A06B-6055-Hxxx #H7xx
LM T.
M: Specification for main spindle motor
Specify either of inner circulation or external radiation.
S: Select out of following table in accordance with combination of main

and sub columns.
~
Model Model Model Model Model Model
n 1 2 3 6 8 12
Model 22 - - - - - H738
Model 18 - H726 H727 - - -

Model 15 H718 H719 - - H722 -
Model 12 H712 H713 - H715 - -
Model 8 H707 H708 - - - -
Model 6 - H704 - - - -
~
Model Model
n 1 2
Model 22P (UNIT:M15) - H758
Model 12P (UNIT:M6) H748 H749
(2) Spindle selector control circuit
Specifications Remarks
A06B-6055-J701 Orientation circuit selector function is not

valid.
A06B-6055-J702 Orientation circuit selector function is valid.
VIII - 2
3. FUNCTIONS
The functions of the spindle motors selector control circuit, which is

optionally available, are as follows:
(1) Control can be switched from one motor to another.
(2) It can send and receive motor selection request/completion signals.
(3) Signal lines for speed feedback can be selected.
(4) Signal lines for orientation can be selected (Signal lines for both the
magnetic sensor and the position coder can be selected).
(5) Circuit protection and abnormal operation detection capabilities are

utilized.
a) If the check signal for power-line status changes while the AC

spindle motor is running, an alarm is generated when an abnormal
condition occurs. And the power from the spindle servo unit to the
spindle motor is temporarily cut off.
b) The check signal for power line status is used to see if the
selected spindle motor matches the control circuit. An alarm is
generated when an abnormal condition occurs.
Note) See 6.1 for the details on the power-line status check signal.
For output of tachometer and dynamometor refer to II-7. 6, 7. 7

respectively. The display selector is provided by the customer.
VIII - 3
4. OUTER DIMENSIONS
The following shows the outer dimensions of the AC spindle servo unit
when the spindle motors selector control circuit is added to it.
1) The height of the servo unit is becomes 350mm from 295mm of the
conventional type.
Main spindle control circuit

printed-circuit board
e
e
.,..
0 AC spindle servo unit
M
500 mm or 860 mm
2) The dimension of the upper maintenance area is changed from its

conventional 50 mm to 100 mm~
700
or
1060
AC spindle setvo unit
500
or
860
384
VIII - 4
3) External dimensions of spindle selector control circuit
Parts on PCB
,--,n_.J.
IH - \t r-
I I r- 0
I
I
CNlO CN2M CN2S CNAM CNAS I
I
I
I
...,
0 I
-
0
I
I
I
I
-
-.r
I
I
I 0
CND CN2C CNAC - I
-~ I I. I L[ ~
265
300 85
VIII - 5
5. CONNECTIONS
5.1 Connection Diagram
The main spindle selector control circuit is provided at the main spindle
control unit of the AC spindle servo unit.
~------
I
------------------------------ ---· ---------- .. -..., '
Power-line selector signal, '

Power-line status check signal Relay
~--------------------------~--------------~ ckcwt
Speed feedback signal line
MAIN SUB. Signal line for orientation

MAIN SUB . .....-------.
r-------- ------------.
AC SPINDLE
MOTOR
CN2M CN2S CNAM CNAS
Main spindle selector

ra-- 8 MArNp
control circuit (option) Electro-
magnetic Sensor
CND CN2C CNAC contactor MAIN
i- s;ie"CtO"r-re(iii;st L.J L.J
: signal, Selector
: completion signal SENSOR
I FOR
'
L- ----, ORIENT ATION
AC spindle servo unit 1 AC SPINDLE

I MOTOR
I
PMC Main spindle servo unit I
I
Power -+-
magnetic
r-orc- '
Electro- . :
sus.p
sequence magnetic : Sensor
Orientation circuit
(option) contactor: SUB.
I
I
I
CNA i SENSOR
:FOR
CNl L~ CN2 :ORIENTATION
I
I I
L.----------, ~
'
- - - - - - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ,.J
I
'I
I
I
I
1 Main spindle control signal :
... _- ------------- -----J L____P~~~:~~~ !~n-~~~o_r-~~--- ________ _,
Note) Power lines, cables, relay circuits, and electromagnetic contactors

shown in must be provided by the machine tool builder.
VIII - 6
5.2 Connector
1) CN2M, CN2S (Speed feedback signal)
14 PA 01 ov
08
15 RA 02 OR2
09
16 PB 03 ORl
10
17 RB 04
11
18 05
12
19 06
13
20 ss 07
2) CNAM, CNAS (Orientation circuit signal)
14 MSA(SC) 01 (OR)
08
15 MSB(*SC) 02 (OR)
09
16 LSA(PA) 03 (OR)
10
17 LSB(*PA) 04 (5R)
11
18 +15V(PB) 05 (5R)
12
19 OV(*PB) 06 (5R)
13
20 OG(OG) 07
Signal name: For magnetic sensor (position coder)
3) CND (Selector signal)
14 CRP1 01 SELl
08
15 CHP2 02 SEL2
09
16 CFINl 03 MCFl
10
17 CFIN2 04 MCF2
11
18 05
12
19 06
13
20 ss 07
PCB side connector MR-20RMA

Magnetics sequence side connector MR-20LFH
VIII - 7
6. INTERFACE
6.1 Input Signal
(1) Selector request signal (SELl, SEL2)
Use this signal for selecting the main spindle. The main spindle and sub
spindle can be · selected by opening (OFF) or closing (ON) the contact,
respectively.
(OFF) -Select the main spindle

(ON) -Select· the sub. spindle
Always feed this signal when the main spindle motor is at halt. The
"speed zero signal" can be used to check to see if the main spindle motor
is at halt.
Receiver circuit at the main Power magnetic

spindle selector control circuit sequence side
CND SELl
(01)
SEL2
ov
(2) Check signal for power line status (MCFl, MCF2)
'
Use this signal for checking the selection status of electromagnetic
contactor for selecting the power line for the spindle motor. The main
and sub. spindles are selected when the contact is open (OFF) and closed
(ON), respectively.
(OFF) + Select the main spindle

(ON) + Select the sub. spindle

control circuit side
Receiver circuit
CND MCFl
(03)
MCF2
ov
VIII - 8
6.2 Output Signal
(1) Power line selector signal (CHPl, CHP2)
When the motor stops and the power supply is cut off at the request of
the selector request signal, the status of the power line selector signal
is changed over. Namely, this status is changed over when no current
flows to the motor.
Select the main and sub. spindle when this signal is off and on,
respectively.
(OFF) ~ Select the main spindle

(ON) ~ Select the sub. spindle
Use this signal to select the electromagnetic contactor for power line
selection by providing a power relay outside the main spindle .control
circuit.
+24 +24V
control circuit side Relay
CND
(14)
Contact capacity
30V
SOmA
CHP2
(15)
ov
Use a relay for 24 DVC as an external relay since a photo coupler is in

use for output signal.
VIII - 9
(2) Selector completion signal (CFINl, CFIN2)
After the selector request signal for the main spindle is input, it is
checked to see if the same selection status is selected by feeding the
check signal for power line status. Also the main spindle control
circuit is initially set. When all the above operations are completed,
the succeeding operations. are ready to be initiated and this selector
completion signal is output.
When this signal is on, the sub spindle is selected, while it is off, the
main spindle is selected.
(OFF) + Select the main spindle

(ON) + Select the sub. spindle
+24 +24V
Main spindle selector Power magnetic
control circuit side sequence side
Relay
CND
(16)
Contact capacity
30 v
CFIN2 SOmA
(17)
OV
Use a relay for 24 DVC since a photo coupler is in use at output signal
stage. Make sure that polarity of the relay is correct.
VIII - 10
7. SEQUENCE
Perform control of signals in the following sequence:
SFR OFF SFR OFF SFR

Main spindle forward ON . - - - - - - - - , ON ,...-------,ON
rotation/reverse rotation
command signals SFR/SRV
Spindle motor speed
OFF OFF
Speed zero signal
Selector request signal Sub (ON)

(input signal)
See 6.1 (I)
Power line selector Main(OFF) Sub (ON)
signal (output signal)
See 6.2 (1)
Check signal for power Main (OFF) Sub (ON)

line status (input signal)
See 6.1 (2)
Main(OFF) Sub (ON) Main(OFF)

Selector completion signal ~----------+-----~
(output signal) Approx. Approx.
See 6.2 (2) O.Ss O.Ss
VIII - 11
8. CAUTIONS ON USE
1) Use the electromagnetic contactors for power line selector application

with proper capacity for each spindle motor.
Example
AC spindle motors Examples of electromagnetic contactors*

MODEL 1, 2 SRC3631-5-2
MODEL 3, 6 SRCa3631-2
MODEL 8, 12 SC-2S
MODEL 15 SC-3
MODEL 18 SC-4
MODEL 22 SC-4S
* Electromagnetic contactors manufactured by Fuji Electric Company are

shown here.
2) A photo coupler is used at the output signal stage. Make sure that its
polarity is correct when connecting it to the circuit.
3) The maximum impressed voltage and the maximum current applied to the photo
coupler are 30 V and 50 mA, respectively.
4) Always use the electromagnetic contactors for selection power line with a
noise protector such as S2-A with built-in resistors and capacitors to
suppress electrical switching noise.
5) To use a tachometer or dynamometer whose display voltage differs between

main and sub spindles, switch the circuit as follows.
Switching circuit
SMl
(LMl)
Revolution/power display
voltage of AC spindle
Tachometer
servo unit· or dynamometer
OM
6) Availability: PCB A20B-1001-0120 edition 08C or after
VIII - 12
7) Spindle selector for same models
Selection from two same spindle motors using one spindle amplifier is
described in this section. The optional spindle selector circuit is not
required. The selector circuit of signal lines, however, is to be
prepared.
a) Connection
0 0 First spindle motor
c
Spindle amp.
Power line
0 c Second spindle
motor
Signal line II Power line
Magnetics sequence
PC
Selector signal of power and signal lines
•.Use the magnetic contactor to select the power line

• Use the mercury-contact relay to select the signal line
b) Selection sequence
Forward/reverse rotation command

ON
SFR/SRV
Motor speed
Zero-speed signal SST
Timer for selecting axis
Motion of axis selection Select axis

Complete
- Turn off the rotation command.

- Start the axis selection approx. 1. 0 second after detecting the
zero-speed signal, the motor current is zero.
- It is not necessary to turn off the magnetic contactor in the
spindle amplifier.
- Parameters for motor cannot be set respectively.
VIII - 13
IX. VELOCITY GAIN SELECTOR CIRCUIT
1. GENERAL
The velocity gain selector circuit (option) controls the velocity loop
gain inside the AC spindle servo unit by selecting the gain according to an
external signal.
For the purpose of improving the accuracy and stability in orienting the
spindle with enhanced velocity loop gain of the AC spindle servo and also
reducing the orientation time according to contact signals, this option
circuit is employed .when the orientation control of the spindle is executed
using the position control circuit other than that of the AC spindle servo
unit, while receiving a position feedback signal from the position coder
directly coupled to the spindle of an NC machine tool.
This circuit is available for spindle position control at NC control
circuit
2. FEATURES
(1) Stable control

The spindle orientation control is stable with reduced orientation time
and higher orientation accuracy, even if the position control circuit
other than the AC spindle servo unit option is used.
(2) Simple control

The spindle orientation is easily controllable using a contact signal
only.
3. CONFIGURATION
The velocity gain selector circuit option is composed as shown in the

following figure •
....I -------- ....

I
I
I
I
I Spindle
I
I servo unit
I
I
I r-----------, Gear or belt
: 1 Magnetic cabinet I CN9
1 Position ~~ sequence circuit i; CNl
:1 control r-.J1 L-----------J 1._ __
1 circuit ~------------------
1 I
L----r----...1 ; Spindle Tool
:
;
Velocity gain selector circuit
(option) :
~~
1 Position control loop ~ Coupling gear
1 or timing belt (1 : 1)
L..- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - _ _ _ _ _ ...
Position coder
Fig. 3.1
IX - 1
4. EXTERNAL VIEWS
4.1 External View of Velocity Gain Selector Circuit for MODEL 3 - 40
,. so
'I
I
A
I
}\
I 1-- r-
I
CN9 0 I
Q()
0 I 0
ID I
I
I
I '--
I I
L..--
100
•I
I
300 .I
4.2 External View of Velocity Gain Selector Circuit"for MODEL 1, 2, and Small MODEL 3
... n r r--. r-r
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CN9 .,.,
I
ID
... ...
I
I
I
-- - ---- ----- ----- I
... -
I. 100 .I
236 so
IX - 2
5. INTERFACE
The functions of these three signals differ from those described in

section II-7. For details, see "6. Details of signals".
r--- -------- ---------;
I
Position control circuit ~-AC spindle se~o unit
CNl
Shielded cable
----- DA2
''
(31)
Velocity command voltage : Higher than 1OOkn

I
I
(32)
E
~------ ov
I
I
I
L--- - - - - ----------..J
r----- --------------;
I I
I +24V
~~I-~4 s___,)II _____.

1 Magnetic sequence circuit :
I I
: r----~¢~-------SFR
· ~j
h(l3)
..........
1I*PosJt!Ve
· · rotation 1I
1 command signal :
I ¢>---- OR
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i '1(25)
Orientation
command
~
'(
r----~¢r---- ORCMl
!
1
? 3.3kn II
~--¢r----- ORCM2
I
~(26)
I L__o_v_____
~------------------~
* Negative rotation command signal is not used.
Spindle servo unit
IX - 3
!"
No. I Signal
name
I Signal
contents
Type
I Significant
level
I Send direction
I Details of contents
I
cm
-f
!:
1 I DA2-E I Velocity
command
Analog
voltage
I 0 to ±10V
II ~Position H
control Spindle I (1) Either + or - analog velocity command voltage is
externally inputtable.
r-
tJ)
.,0
voltage circuit · (2) ~10V correspond to the maximum velocity of the spindle tJ)
motor. The relation between the specified voltage and t5
the rotation speed is as shown in Fig. 6.1, 2
l>
(3) The input impedance is higher than 100k0. J;;
2 I SFR-OS I ON (1) The spindle motor rotates counterclockwise (CCW) as
Positive
rotation
Contact
(closed) I cabinet
Magnetics
- Spindle
viewed from the shaft side when the velocity command
command sequence voltage is positive (+) with the contact turned on
signal circuit (closed). The spindle motor rotates clockwise (CW) when
the velocity command voltage is negative (-).
I I
H
:><! I I 3 ORCM1-
ORCM2
Orientation
command
Contact ON
(closed)
Magnetics
cabinet
- Spindle
(1) This signal does not function as the spindle orientation
function, but it is used when selectively enhancing the
.f:- I I sequence velocity loop gain inside the AC spindle servo from the
circuit external unit.
(2) When this signal is applied, the velocity command voltage
becomes effective, and the motor becomes controllable.
(3) When this signal is applied, the positive rotation
command signal becomes ineffective.
(4) Turn off (open) the positive rotation command signal for
a safety purpose when this signal is being applied.
By this operation, the spindle does not start rotating,
even if the ORCM1, 2 contacts should have been turned off
(open) during orientation or the orientation is
cancelled.
(5) The velocity loop gain is selected when this signal is
turned on (closed), and the motor revolutions have been
reduced to less than about 1/100 of the maximum
revolutions.
(6) When this signal is applied, the light-emitting diode
(LED) lights.
Normal rotation (Motor rotates counterclockwise
Max. speed as viewed from the motor shaft.)
Max. speed
Reverse rotation
Fig. 6 Relation between Command Voltage and Speed
IX- 5
7. SEQUENCE
7.1 Sequence During Stop
Positive rotation command ON (closed)

signal SFR, OR
ON (closed)
Orientation command
ORCMl, 2
CW direction \
- IS- 20 ms
1- (Delay time of receiver)
-....__
Stop ll
/ Stop
........... •
Motor speed _,,
ccW direction
-------J I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'
'
' '--------' -- ...-'
About 1/100 ofthe
maximum speed
t
Velocity loop ga in High High

\...
7.2 Sequence During High Speed Rotation
Positive rotation command ' ON (closed)

signal SFR, OR
ON (closed)
Orientation command
ORCMl, 2
More than 20 ms
High speed
CW direction Deceleration
"' "
______, --- About 1/100 of the
maximum speed
, ""
CCW direction / ""
-------------"'
Velocity loop gain High
IX - 6
8. ORDER SPECIFICATION
This option comprises the following two types according to the models of
the AC spindle servo unit.
(Ordering specification number)
Specification number
Name
For MODEL 3 to 40 For MODEL 1, 2, small MODEL 3
Velocity gain selector

A06B-6044-J701 A06B-6052-J701
circuit
This option is mounted on the AC spindle servo unit PCB.
IX - 7
X. BUILT-IN SENSOR SIGNAL CONVERSION CIRCUIT
1. GENERAL
This section describes signal conversion circuits for spindle motors having a
spindle positioning function and built-in motors mounted directly on the
spindle of NC machine tools.
2. FEATURES
This circuit has a speed detector function for the spindle motor and a
position coder function detecting rotating position and spindle speed.
3. CONFIGURATION AND ORDER SPECIFICATIONS
1) Configuration
Spindle motor
Built-in motor ~
Signal
Spindle
conversion I - -
amplifier
circuit
PC
NC device
2) Order Specification
Category Name Order specification
Basic Signal conversion circuit A06B-6044-H603
X- 1
4. SPECIFICATIONS
1) Signal and No. of square waves/revolution

A phase 1024 pulses/revolution (See *1)
B phase 1024 pulses/revolution (See *1)
Z phase 1 pulse/revolution
2) Power supply
Voltage +5.000 V, +5%, -10%
Current 100 mA or less
3) Signal level: TTL level
4) Maximum speed rpm: 10,000 rpm (See *2)
5) Ambient operating temperature range: 0 to 55°C
*1. The specification of 512 pulses/revolution is also available,

depending on the specification of work.
*2. If the unit is used at more than 6,000 rpm, VRl, 2 and 3 should be
adjusted as follows.
Signal Measuring Measuring Adjusting Adjuted

Remarks
conditions points point value
A phase Rotation CH7-CH10 VR1 +12 mV Since the phase is

direction cw, - shifted according to
B phase ccw CH8-CH10 VR2 +12 mV the rotation
- direction,
z phase Rotation speed CH9-CH10 VR3 -180 mV to re-adjustment is
1,500 rpm -220 mV required.
A phase, B phase Z phase
~~(\ Adjusted value
1 '±12mV
-,. .- D Adjusted value
-180mV- -220mV
0VL-------~--------~~~----
~==~~~r=~l==~
!.44V-3.2~ I
__ =-2.00Vv ,
X- 2
5. DIMENSIONS
(Specification: AZOB-9000-0180)
0 0
CN1
-
00
-
0 N
CN3 CN2
? ~I
I. 128 .I
I. 140
.I
Example of mounting
220
(Size with a connector mounted)
0
N
I I
Insulating sleeve and others Appr. 10
Mounting plate
A PCB shall be mounted apart by setting an insulating sleeve, etc.
X- 3
~
r Waveform conversion 8z
UHI ...., circuit
I
I A20B-9000-0180 z
OH20 CN1
m
~
I
14 vz
AC spindle motor Cap made by I
I
e! e ~Qill IS sz
thermostat AMP I Plug made by AMP ~ ~ ~Q!!! 16 VA
A63L-0001- I A63L-0001- ~ !Q_ r-[ ] NC c
0219/12-COO I 0219/12-POO 04 ~
_!!_ J1 ~
Pin 1 Socket
A63L-0001- 1A63L-DOOI- ~~ ~~ ~
~ - ~- ~ ~
CN1 0220-SP706-7 1 220/UN689-6 ::0
Built-in sensor r
CNl
[J UJ- KOl
L 0 07 ~- 20 OG
~
CNl
1 4 cJJKOO CN1 i
2 *VA 5 VA
Connector
MR-20LFH
<
3 *VB 6 VB CN2 CN2 K04 0'
~
!i ~ .Q! ~
f---
~ ~ ~- _!g ~
I
X Connector
~ ~ ~- ~ ~
CNl,CN2 Plug made by AMP
CN2 A63L-0001-
-ll'- 1 sv 4 sv 0302/6C01
1 sv 7 vz !I ~ ~~ ~ ~ AC spindle servo unit
!! _!!_ ~e.- ~ ~
Contact
2 vz 5 CNl,CN2 2 VA 8
3 ov 6 ov A63L-0001-
0305/B
3 *VA 9 .!2 ~ 13
g~
~~
§
4 ov 10 OH
5 VB 11 ss
20 OG I--'-- 07 CNB
r] !
6 *VB 12 OH
CNB
Connector
L I 8'
n
CN3
[
, K02
MR-20LFH CNA
Orientation circuit
r] ~·
~~ - - 1~ ~
~-----1 ~ ~
.J
CN2
CNA
Connector
L
a:
~~ Connector MR-20LFH
~-1 ~ ~
L
~~
~-
~---' 17 ~
_!!_ -
,
MR-20LMH
[J K03
r ]
L
~ _!!
- ~- .!!- rN'l
~ - Q~ 20 - ss
07 ~
7. CABLE
The cable specifications are as follows. These cables should be provided at

the customer's end.
FANUC specification
Applications Symbol General specifications DWG No.
(Cable assembly)
AC spindle KOO HONDA AMP A06B-6044-K207

motor connector Z-374 Cap 350735-1 (0.5 m)
Contact HKP-F413 Pin 350706-7
Waveform conversion
~/
circuit I
riO
I I
Vinyl cable with braided shield
8 cores x 0.18 mm 2 (7/0.18)
AC spindle motor K01 AMP plug 350783-1 A06B-6044-K206

Socket 350689-6 MR-20LFH
(7 m)
Waveform conversion
circuit
\ 1()10 ,-L.,
I 1~-7
- -. . .- ------4---U
10 cores x 0.2 mm2 (7/0.18)
Waveform conversion K02 A06B-6041-K205

circuit (7 m)
Control circuit for

oriented spindle stop M~~--~--------~()~lO~~:[M~:;;H
10 cores x 0.2 mm 2 (7/0.18)
Waveform conversion K03 A06B-6041-K202

circuit (7 m)

1.0 cores x 0.2 mm 2 (7/0.18)
X- 5
FANUC specification
Applications Symbol General specifications DWG No.
(Cable assembly)
Control circuit for K04 A06B-6041-K202
MR-20LFH MR-20LFH
oriented spindle stop (7 m)
NC
(;/ ~10
~
-
10 cores x 0.2 mm2 (7/0.18)
X- 6
APPENDIX
.,.,
)>
m
z
c
AC Spindle Servo unit
Connector (AMP) ><
~
Housing
"TI 350720-1
.p· AC Spindle motor 0
... KS
CNI CNt CN2 ,
no
CN2
Soket
350689~
Qq
connector 0
z
g MR- -{][ ~
K4 Housing z
50LFH
MR-20LFM Stgnal
line
350782-1
Pin m
-1 350706-7 0
CN3 R03 IARST 'I SST I -t
i. Magnetic contwl
cabinet
K6
MR-
][
36 20
R04 IARST21 SST2
4
~
0
z
8 20LMH R05
I
TLMI! I TLML
:I
:I OM 38
R06 ORARII OT
K2 02] c
!. K7 iSM1 t--#7- 0RAR2,MRfYI
23 7
00 )>
Ci)
TB ~
0
:I 2~ -- Crimp terminal ::0
Q. Crimp R08 CTM ~IR~Y2 TB Tl )>
ii' 5 -
(Tl-3) R09 ORCMII TLM5 3:
ca terminal
(Screw
26 I I 0
i1 .ti
RIO ORCM21 TLM6
terminal
3
~
M 3 l M4
> .... 4
ff:
27 II
...0 AC power No-fuse breaker Rll OVR I AL~I I

I r-- --, r---, Tl H • 28 !__
I ~
3: w'" Rl2 OVR2 I At.M2 6
1-'
0 3-phase~
I I
Q-----t---0 I s I 29
I"~'"=·~~ -
SFR +t 5\' OR
0 2·10\' T Power I I I S 0
m
........
I ' Kl , 4
·180V ~ Y j v I 1
3
N
~ (Option) ~0+
Dl
:I
Q.
3
!!:
0_)
r
L____ __jI
1 L ___ .J ~
Crimp terminal
mM.EB b--0 '1'2-1 KB '1'3-1
~
Resistor unit
1sn
Standard ( lkW)
M4
~
j-l Fuse or
1 I (SA)
Crimp
terminal
Crimp
terminal !UTI
i '----. J No-fuse breaker 'f-J Thermostat line
3:
0
0
m K3
....
w K9
To magnetics cabinet
Connector (AMP)
AC Spindle Servo unit
Housing
3~1!12.!!:_1_ AC Spindle motor
CNI CNI C:-12 connector
CNZ Soket
'"II
~·
KS
MR- -D[ 0 MR-20LFM
K4
350689-6
a~ SliD Housing
350782-1
... SOLFH Une Pin
350706-7
g Magnetic control
cabinet R04 lARST2JSST2
=r
-t
l
8
:II
Roo
39
R07
unl\nlj VI
23
ORAR2JMRDYI
2
K2 I~ I
:II ROB CTM ~Y2 Tl
Crimp terminal
I'
g.
~
R09 iORCMII TLMS
~
u_ I
26 I l.!L
:II RIO ORCM2J TLM6 I
·ICL iT'T2f
> j'
N
.a AC power
suppI y
3-phase~
r----,
I
No-fuse breaker
?---f-o
Ir----,
.--.. I II
Rll I OVRI I ALMI
Rl2
28
OVR2 ALM2
29
IT
.go
iii:
.
'2-lt \
·1110\'
I Power
~
S Jlransformer 1 ...--...
?------t---0 I
K1
SFR
SRI'
+15\'
3
DAI
I
OR
OS
ii
II
17 fALSI -,
10
0 (Option) <}--f-o-
DA2 16 IAL4
0 ~ 1
I:SPI SOT I
6 1'~
m '1'~-1 '1'3-1
r-
MJB
(l I L ___ _J Crimpterminal K8 Resistor unit
N _j,,.::::...___ 15Sl
.-:r.
N
L
I ____ __. I CSJ
:! 2 Standard ( 1kw>
M4
r-1j ~
Crimp
<
'% Fuse or terminal
Crimp
terminal
pTh~•~'"'
1 (SA)
&... - No-fuse breaker
K3 J
K9
To magnetics cabinet
"'I
rp·
...
E
g-t AMP
~~ AC Spindle servo unit
Connector
Housing
"Ws CNI 350720·1 AC Spindle motor
~i CNI
I~
Connector
!i! a.
"w~
<a.
KS
MR-
50J.fll
~
~
R03
X SAR2
ARSTI SST I
3
PB
6
2
PA
5
I I AMP
i5V
·I
Housing
350782·1
Pin
I
Magnetic 36 0 IW I! A OV:
::t -· 350706-7
.:..I control K6 R04 ARST2 SST2 !J 8 7
~il cabinet MR- ROS TLMH TLML 0112 ss <Mil '
rn
::z::a 20LMH 3B
.011 ..cr RO&
39
ORARI
23
OT K2 I II .z. I \' .x \\',,
'Vi: K7 R07 0RAR2 RDYI
I o I v \V
ao ROB
•
CTN IRDY2 Screw tenninal M6
> .,~~.... K09 ORCNI TLN5

6 0 Screw
K3
w RIO ORCM2 TLM6 tenninal
w a Rll
27 I
OVRI ALMI 20 7
MS
~li!Jl
~'\Ill
-~Cl. AC
powersupplyr----, r---,
No-fuse breaker •
Rl2 OVR2 ALN2 19
13
COM 6
12
3·phase~ !~
I J.. SFR +15V OR I
24 0 V r Power y---:v I
1 S ltransfonner ~...-... , l Kll SRI' DAI OS 17 ALB
•
480\' ~
H-oo.-i
10
i ...., 0"-ilr-+,_ _;____-<, 3
~ T 1
'(
(Option)
ESP I DA2 SOT I
I
16 AL4
9
3
Fuse folder
~ ESP2 E SDT2 15 AL2
g: I L ___ .J -dl'i-
X~ --tf.t-1 14 AI. I I
m
'
~
iii Crimp
CN3
II tenninal
I
c:
:s
I
L-----' Tenninal G is for cabinet
srounding (screw tenninal M6)
:If
~
0
m
....
w
AMP
"TT
,p· AC Spindle servo unit
....
~
i§ Magnetics control
cabinet
I·
a.
> iii'
'93
""' ..d'
3: AC No-fuse breaker
0 powersupplyr----, r---,
0
m
r
3-phase ~
'>
- ·10 \
. J Power
1 transfonner
r--+o---t>-!
I
...., 1
I
~ I ~ A...__t_--'"'------~ I
·lllO\ T '(~
! ~(Option)
T
1
<(---i-o
1 ...--..,
0 I
~ (l 1 I L ___ _J
Crimp
I
II tenninal
L-----' G I is connected with G2
on the terminal board T I.
.,
.p·
... AMP connector
~ AC spindle servo motor
Housing
-1 l"SI csz 350720-1 AC spindle motor
0 ('\1 ~~ Socket Connector
!! K5
~ [>( ~ l';\12 350689-6 3 2 I AMP
8
:II ROJ ARSTI SST I
SARZ
•
0 MR-20LFHK 4 01 PB PA . 5\ Housing
6 5 4 3507K2-I
Signariin e RB RA 0\" Pin
i Magnetics panel K& ••• ARST2 SSTZ 50706-7
a.0 ••• TL.'-111 TL.\fL
9
<»12
8
ss
7
Ufl
:II -::.--
)
__ll__
ORARI
)
~-
K2
CL
> i'; K7 ROI
-~-UL
ORARl ROY I
••• CT~ RDY2 Crip

VI a ••• ORCNI TL\15 w style terminal
.
d' RIO
I
-w- -~ ~
ORCN2•TLM6
20 1
nal M3)
K3
~
c AC power . Breaker "" 0\"12 .\l..'4~ I 0 '
r---, ~~'fr ~h ·--tt- 12
m 3-phase ll '
~C
II
r- 380V
1 SR\" DAI OS I
•
I
~ to s 1
00 I ~
ESPI DA2 SDTI I
•
".
•• ~'"'"
::1:
<
415V
0
T
I
I
I~
L 0 JI
__
< £SP2
~ )('\ P.t
fc';.t-
t SPT2
. A I
ll"'hullin
FMB
{
KJO ) c;>Fan·unit or fa
motor
I< Single pahse 220A :crimp style terminal

~VI -
fMI~
~
2~~vili}V 2~ ~~;gtl T2
22ov .W--r.~;;~==~;-:--:---_j
2208
G I is connected to G2 on terminal Tl
/
APPENDIX 2 CABLE ROUTING (2-1) Model 3, 6
(A06B-6044-H103, -Hl06, -H007, HOOS)
(1-1) MODEL 1, 2, Small mode13
(A06B-6052-H001, H002, H003) Digital servo unit model3, 3H, 3VH, 6, 6H, 6VH, SP, 12P
(A06B-6055-Hl03, -H203, -Hl06, -H206)
KTo resistor unit
<H·:
,.~ Control PCB 1

1100 0080
A16B PCB
~~~t~~! p~~. 21
,T~:o:
Tl ('1\:l
1 I -'.{ ~ tc_;(;t: \'\\' -. --- /
Lt".:N~:,r._ C'N2 C'N"
l ~ Resistor unit
ti='TGC;I'V\\'
--- To motor
powo~'
To magnetic cabinet
To II To magnetic cabinet orNC
motor orNC
From AC PCB mount plate is open.
To motor To magnetic cabinet
orNC
( 1-2) PCB for digital servo unit model 2H, 2VH (2-2) Model 3, 6
(A06B-6044-H007, -HOOS)
Control PCB 1
From AC power
To motor To motor
To magnetic cabinet
orNC (2-3) Model 3,6
Digital servo unit model 3, 3H, 3VH, 6, 6H, 6VH, SP, 12P
(A06B-6055-Hl03, -H203, -Hl06, -H206)
From AC power To fan

To motor
A - 6
(3-1) Model 8, 12 (Small) (4-1) Model 8, 12, 15
(A06B-6044-Hl08, -HI 12) (A06B-6044-H011)
Digital servo unit model 8, Digital servo unit model IS, ISH, 22P
8H, 8VH, 12, 12H, 12VH, lSP, 18P (A06B-6055-Hll5, -H215)
(A06B-6055-H 108, -H208, -Hll2, H212)
PCB
0
To motor
~
To magnetic cabinet
orNC
(3-2) PCB mount plate is open.
From AC power Power line Fan motor

To motor
(4-2) Model 8, l2 (Large)

(A06B-6044-H009, -HOlO)
Power line Fan motor

To motor
To fan motor
From AC power To motor
A- 7
(5) Modell8, 22 (3-phase fan motor) (7) Model 30HV, 40HV
Digital servo unit modell8, 22, 18H, 22H (A06B-6054-H030, H040)
(A06B-6055-Hll8, -H218, -Hl22, -H222)
PCB
PCB
!'NI CN3
CN!
To motor
To magnetic
•. • magnetic cabinet cabinet or NC
or NC
From AC power
To motor To fan motor (motor)
AC power
(6) Model 30, 40 From single phase power
PCB
To motor
To magnetic cabinet
orNC
-:::: (model40)
Power line Fan motor

To motor
A- 8
APPENDIX 3 CABLE SPECIFICATIONS
The cable specifications are as shown below.

Prepare cables by users.
1) Power line and motive power line for respective motor models
Use Symbol Specifications FANUC

specification No.
Cabtyre cable
JIS C3312,4 cores
For MODEL 1 K1 A06B-6052-K201
(Lower than K2 37/0.26 7m long
5kVA) (2.0mm 2 )
Crimp style Crimp style
terminals terminals
T24 T24
Cabtyre calbe
JIS C3312, 4 cores A06B-6052-K202
For MODEL 2 K1
(Lower than K2 7m long
45/0.32
7kVA) (3.5mm 2 )
terminals terminals
T5.54 T5.54
Cabtyre cable
JIS C3312, 4 cores
For MODEL 3 K1 A02B-0008-K853
(Lower than K2 7m long
70/0.32
12kVA) (5.5mm 2 )
terminals terminals
T5.5-6 T5.5-6
Cabtyre cable
For MODEL 6, JIS C3312, 4 conductors
K1 A02B-0008-K854
3H, 8P, 12P K2 7m long
(Lower than 50/0.45
16kVA) Crimp style
(8mm 2 )
Crimp style
terminals terminals
8-6 8-6
Cabtyre cable
For MODEL 6, JIS C3312, 4 cores
6H, 8H, 12, K1 A06B-6044-K017
12H, 15P ,18P '1-----l 7m long
88/0.45
3VH, 6VH (14mm 2 )
(Lower than K2 Crimp style Crimp style A06B-6044-K018
terminals terminals
25kVA) 14-6 (K2: Motive power line) 14-6 7m long
14-8 (K1: Power line)
A- 9
Use Symbol Specifications FANUC
specification No.
Heat-proof vinyl
cabtyre cable
~
For MODEL 4 cores
~
15, 15H, 22P, K1 A06B-6044-K019
12VH K2 7m long
(Lower than 7/20/0.45.
1
30kVA) Crimp style (22mm 2 ) 11130
Crimp style
terminals terminals
22-8 R22-6S
Heat-proof vinyl
For MODEL
cabtyre cable
4cores I b
~
18, 18H, 30P K1 E'----(") A06B-6044-K020
(Lower than K2 7/27/0.45
t 7m long
(30mm 2 ) 11134.1
38kVA)
Crimp style
terminals Crimp style
38-8 terminals
38-8
Heat-proof vinyl
cabtyre cable
4 cores
For MODEL
~
K1 A06B-6044-K021
22,22H, 40P, K2 I ~
E'- -() 7m long
50P t
(Lower than 7/34/0.45
(38mm 2 ) 11138
45kVA)
terminals terminals
38-8 38-8
Heat-proof cable for 600 VAC

Single wire (a) x 3 lines and
(b) x I line
(a) Conductor
7/34/0.45 (38 mm2)
Crimp terminal T38-IO
Power cable K1 @• •@
and power K2 A06B-6044-K202
source cable (b) Conductor 7m long
for MODEL 30 7/20/0.45 (22 mm2)
@I I@
Single wire (a) x 3 lines and
(b) x I line
(a) Conductor
K1 19/20/0.45 (50 mm2)

Power cable K2
and power @• I@ A02B-6044-K203
source cable 7m long
. for MODEL 40
(b) Conductor
7/20/0.45 (22 mm2)

Crimp terminal T38-10
@I I@
A - 10
Use Symbol Specifications
FANUC
specification No.
Single wire (a) X 4 lines
Power cable (a) Conductor

'
and power Kl 7/27/0. 45 (30m m')
source cable K2 Crimp terminal T38-10
for MODEL 30HV
@I I@
Single wire (a) X 4 lines

Power cable
(a) Conductor
and power Kl
source cable K2 7/34/0.45 (38m m')
for MODEL 40HV Crimp terminal T38-10
@I I@
A- 11
2) Common line
The following cables are common to each model.
Symbol Specifications FANUC

Use specification No.
Vinyl cabtyre cable
Spindle servo unit K3 Spindle JIS C 3312, 2 conductors
servo Motor
t KlO unit ~ side
AC spindle motor side A06B-6044-K022
(for '9110.5
(Cooling fan) motor Crimp style Crimp style 7m long
MODEL 37/0.26 terminals
terminals (2mm')
30,40) T2-S T2-S
Spindle servo unit K4
t Spindle servo unit
option connector
Attached connector
of spindle motor
AC spindle motor
Less than 9110
(for signal) A06B-6044-K200
e D
2 7m long
CN DShielded4-paired L.3mm'
I cable Housirig
350720.1
Contact
:!>'C~~nda
MR·20LFH
~;.J~:~ed
conductor
350689-6
Spindle servo unit KS Spindle servo unit Power magnetic control

t connector (basic)
9112.5
Power magnetic·
control (for
signal)
CNlD ; @ A06B-6044-K023
7m long
MR-SO LFH Braided shield vinyl cable
made by Honda SO conductors x 0.2mm'
TsushinCo. (7/0.18) made by Sanyo
Denko
Spindle servo unit K6

Spindle servo unit
t connector (basic) 9110
:
Power magnetic
control (for
signal) CN3D ~ A06B-6044-K024
7m long
Shielded 4-paired cable
MR·20LMH 0.3mm'
made by Honda
Tsushin Co.
Speedometer K7 Vinyl cabtyre cable

load meter JIS C 3312,3 cores
t j
AC spindle servo A06B-6044-K201
unit (for meter) 7m long
30~0.18 91J.2
Crimp style ( 0. 75mnl) Crimp style
terminal terminal
Tl-4 Tl-4
A - 12
3) Others (lines used in some models)
Use FANUC
Symbol Specifications
specification No.
Vinyl cabtyre cable
For motor cooling· K3 JIS C 3312, 3 cores
fan (For MODEL Conductor 3 7 / 0. 2 6 ( 2m~ )
30, 40) Outer cover PVC ¢10
Crimp style T2-4
terminal
A06B-6044-K204
0
+ ~
© 7m long
0 t
~10.0
~ 0
Resistor unit KS
Vinyl cabtyre cable
t JIS C 33!2 2 cores
AC spindle servo
~
unit
A06B-6052-K200
~11.0 7m long
Crimp style 45/0.32 Crimp style
terminal (2.0 mm•) terminal
T24 T2-4
Resistor unit K9 Vinyl cabtyre cable

JIS C 3312 2 cores
t
~
Power magnetic
control (For A06B-6052-K203
thermostat) ~8.8 7m long
terminal 30/0.!8 terminal
Tl-4 ( 0.75mnl) Tl-3
A - 13
APPENDIX 4 TECHNICAL DATA
1. HOW TO OBTAIN LOAD INERTIA REFLECTED TO MOTOR SHAFT
To obtain the load inertia reflected to motor shaft when the spindle holds the
maximum tool or maximum work, full the procedure described below.
Spindle speed change gear stage Inertia reflected to motor shaft

2
High JH - - - kg.cm.s
2
Low JL --- kg.cm.s
Select the load inertia reflected to motor shaft so that it is less than 3
times the inertia of the spindle motor employed.
As the load inertia is larger, the acceleration/deceleration time becomes
longer.
1) Calculation method of load inertia reflected to motor shaft (Example)
Ja SPINDLE
Workpiece
or tool
Jw
r NL : Max. revolutions at Low
J NH : Max. revolutions at High
\.
SPINDLE
MOTOR
N.
Nm: Maximum speed of motor (rpm)

N1 : Maximum speed when speed change gear stage is low (rpm)
NH: Maximum speed when speed change gear stage is high (rpm)
Ra: Speed ratio between speed change stages NH/NL-
G1: Ratio of motor revolutions to revolutions when speed change gear
stage is low N1 /Nm
GH: Ratio of motor revolutions to revolutions when speed change gear
stage is high NH/N
m 2
J 1: Inertia of shaft directly coupled to motor (kg.cm.s)
J 11 : Inertia of gear or pulley when the motor side speed change gear
stage is low (kg/cm.s 2)
J 1H: Inertia of gear or pulley when the motor side speed change gear
stage is high (kg/cm.s 2)
J 21 : Inertia of gear or pulley when the spindle side speed change gear
stage is low (kg/cm.s 2 )
A - 16
Inertia of gear or pulley when the spindle side speed change gear
stage is high (kg/cm.s 2 )
Inertia of spindle (kg.cm.s 2 )
Inertia of work (kg.cm.s 2)
Q) Calculation formulas when low and high speed change gear stages are
switched by clutch
Inertia reflected 2to motor shaft when the speed change gear stage is
low. J 1 (kg.cm.s )
JL = J1 + 1 11 + (~) 2 x 1 1H + GL 2 x (J2L + 1 2H + JB + Jw) ·· <1- 1)
Inertia reflected zO
motor shaft when the speed change gear stage is
high. JH (kg.cm.s )
2 2
JH = 11 + Ra x J1L + J1H + GH (J2L + 1 2H + JB + JW) ••.•.. ( 1- 2 )
@ Calculation formula when low and high speed change gear stages are
switched by gear shift.
JL J1 + 1 11 + 1 1H + GL2 (J2L + 1 2H + JB + J w ) ............ (1-3)
JH J1 + 1 11 + J1H + GH2 (J2L + 1 2H + JB + J w ) ............ (1-4)
The calculation formulas of respective inertia are given below.
CD Inertia of cylindrical body
L (Cill)
The inertia produced when a cylindrical body rotates around its

center shaft is calculated by the following formula. Calculate ball
screws, gears, etc. by approximating this formula for cylindrical
body.
wy 4 2
J = 32 x 980 D L (kg. em. s ) •••••••••• • ••••••• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ( 1-5)
-3 3
This can be approximated in case of steel (y = 7.8 x 10 kg/em) as
follows.
J = 0.78 x 10- 6 D4L (kg.cm.s 2 ) (1-6)
Where, J: Inertia (kg.cm.s 2 ) 3

y: Weight per unit volume (kg/em )
D: Diameter of cylindrical body (em)
L: Length of cylindrical body (em)
A- 17
GD Inertia of cylindrical body having a deviated rotation center
Jo, M
M 2 2
J = J
0
+ 980 R (kg. em. s ) •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••. {1-7)
2
Where, Jo: Inertia around the center of cylindrical body (kg.cm.s )
M: Weight of cylindrical body (kg)
R: Rotation radius (em)
The above formula applies to calculations of the inertia of large

diameter gears when lightening holes were made for reducing their
weight.
(D Inertia of tapered cylindrical body
L (em)
a 2 (em)
5
= 1TY
al ) 2
J 10 X 980 X
_ a ) x L (kg.cm.s ) •••••••••••••••••• (1-8)
1
A - 18
2. HOW TO FIND THE ACCELERATION TIME
Find the spindle acceleration time in the following manner.
l) Calculate the load inertia for the motor shaft.
2) Find the value required for calculation based on the spindle motor
characteristic table.
3) Find the acceleration time according to the calculation expression.
l) Motor shaft conversion load inertia
According to para. l above, find the load inertia. When GD 2 (kg.m 2) is

found, convert the unit system according to the following equation.
2
J 1 (kg.m.s )
GD 2 (kg.m 2 )
4g (m/s2) • • • .. • • • • • .... •. •. • • ... • • • • •. (4-1)
2 2
Therefore, l kg.m = 0.0255 kg.m.s
2) Spindle motor characteristic table
Output
Output
Torque
Pf
TM 1--.:..._----1---
Torque Pm
0 Nb Nf Nm
Speed rpm N
The following relation exists among output P, torque T and speed rpm N.
P (kW) = 1.0269 x N x T/1000 ••••••••••••••••••••••••••• (4-2)
A - 19
Characteristics of each model at 30-minute rating output
Model name JM TM Nb Nf N pf p
m m
kg.m.s 2 kg.m rpm rpm rpm kW kW
Model 1 0.0003 0.71 3000 8000 - 2.2 -

Model 2 0.0008 2.40 1500 6000 8000 3.7 2.5
Model 3 0.0015 3.57 1500 4500 6000 5.5 3.7
Model 6 0.0022 4.87 1500 6000 - 7.5 -

Model 8 0.0093 7.14 1500 6000 - 11 -
Model 12 0. 0093 9.74 1500 4500 - 15 -
Model 15 0.0093 12.01 1500 4500 - 18.5 -
Model 18 0.0183 14.28 1500 4500 - 22 -
Model 22 0.0183 16.88 1500 4500 - 26 -
Model 30 0.038 31.33 1150 3500 4500 37 26
Model 40 0.038 38.11 1150 3000 4500 45 30
3) Calculation of acceleration time
Acceleration curve
Nm
Nf
Nb
A- 20
Acceleration time
1) Speed rpm 0 to Nb (rpm)
J + JM 211'Nb
t 1 = L ( ) (4-3)
TM x ~ sec
2) Speed rpm Nb to Nf
JL + JM (N2 - N2)
t2
TM X
211'
60 X
f
2Nb
b (sec)
................. (4-4)
3) Speed rpm Nf to N
m
211' (N - N )2
t3 (JL + JM) X X m f
60 p )2
(P -
f m
Note 1) tn: Natural logarithm
Acceleration time t
a
ta = t 1 + t 2 + t 3 (sec) ··············~················· (4-6)
By controlling the deceleration time to nearly the same time as the
acceleration time, the elongation of the tap during tapping processing
can be reduced.
A - 21
3. CUTTING AMOUNT OF MACHINE
The spindle motor output (HP or KW) of machine tools is specified to

indicate their cutting amount, in"general.
Regarding the lathing, milling, and drilling, the relation between the
rate of metal removal and output power will be described by quoting it from
the following references.
References: MACHINING DATA HANDBOOK AIR FORCE MATERIAL LABORATORY

(a) Lathe turning
(b) Machining center, milling using milling machine
(c) Machining center, drilling using drilling machine
(a) Turning
D.
Depth of cut d (mm)
(Cutting conditions)
(1) Spindle revolutions Ns (rpm)
(2) Workpiece diameter Dt (nun)
(3) Feed fr (nun/rev)
(4) Depth of cut d (mm)
(Cutting formulas)
(1) Cutting speed Vc =~ x Dt x Ns (mm/min)
(2) Feed rate fm =fr x Ns (mm/min) 3
(3) Rate of metal removal Q d x fr x Vc/1000 (em /min)
d x fr x ~ x Dt x Ns/1000 (cc/min)
IQ ~ x Dt x d x fm/1000 (cc/min)
(4) Power required at spindle PS = Q/MR.t (kW)
Where, MRt: Rate of metal removal per kW (cc/min/kW)
(5) Power required at spindle motor PM = ln x Q/MRt
Where, n: Drive efficiency of spindle (%)
A - 22
(b) Milling
Feed rate
¢ = f . Cmm/min)
Workpiece
( 1) Spindle revolutions Ns (rpm)
(2) Diameter of milling cutter Dm (mm)
(3) Width of cut w (mm)
(4) Depth of cut d (mm)
(5) Number of teeth in cutter n (pieces)
(6) Feed ft (mm/tooth)
(Cutting formulas)
(1) Cutting speed Vc = n x Dm x Ns (mm/min)
(2) Feed rate fm = ft x n x Ns (mm/min)
(3) Rate of metal removal Q = w x d x ft x n x Ns/1000 (cm 3 /min)
IQ = w x d x fm/1000 (cc/min)l
(4) Power required at spindle PS Q/MRm (kW)

'
Where, MRm: Rate of metal removal per kW (cc/min/kW)
(5) Power required at spindle motor PM = ln x Q/MRm (kW)
A - 23
(c) Drilling
(1) Spindle revolutions Ns (rpm)
(2) Drill diameter Dd (mm)
(3) Feed fr (mm/rev)
(Cutting formulas)
(1) Cutting speed Vc = ~ x Dd x Ns (mm/min)
(2) Feed rate fm = fr x Ns (mm/min)
(3) Rate of metal removal Q = 4~ x Dd

2 3
x fr x Ns/1000 (em /min)
Q =f x Dd 2 x fm/1000 (cc/min)l
(4) Power required at spindle PS = Q/MRd (kW)
Where, MRd! Rate of metal removal per kW (cc/min/kW)
(5) Power required at spindle motor PM = ln x Q/MRd (kW)
A - 24
Rate of metal removal per kW (cc/min/kW) (average values)
(when the drive efficiency of spindle is 80%)
MR: Rate of metal removal per kW

(cc/min/kW)
HARDNESS TURNING MRt MILLING MRm DRILLING MRd
(*1) HSS AND CARBIDE TOOLS HSS DRILLS
MATERIAL Brinell CARBIDE TOOLS feed feed
hardness feed 0.127- 0.127- 0.305 0.05 - 0.203
0.381 mm/rev mm/tooth mm/rev
SHARP DULL SHARP DULL SHARP DULL
TOOL TOOL TOOL TOOL TOOL TOOL
85-200(*4) 20 15.7 20 15.7 21.9 16.8

STEEL-WROUGHT AND 35-40Rc(*2) 15.7 12.9 14.6 ll. 5 15.7 12.9
CAST
Plain Carbon 40-50Rc 14.6 ll. 5 12.2 10 12.9 10.4
Alloy Steels
Tool Steels 50-55Rc 10.9 8.7 10.4 8.4 10.4 8.4
55-58Rc 6.4 5.2 8.4 6.8 8.4 6.8

(*5)
CAST IRONS ll0-190 31.3 24.4 36.6 27.4 21.9 18.3
Gray, Ductile and
Malleable 190-320 15.7 12.9 20 15.7 13.7 10.9
STAINLESS STEELS 135-275 16.8 13.7 15.7 12.9 20 15.7

Ferritic, Austenitic
and Martensitic 30-45Rc 15.7 12.9 14.6 ll. 5 18.3 14.6
PRECIPITATION
HARDENINGS STAINLESS 150-450 15.7 12.9 14.6 ll. 5 18.3 14.6
STEELS
TITANIUM 250-375 18.3 14.6 20 15.7 20 15.7
HIGH TEMPERATURE
ALLOYS 200-360 8.7 7.0 10.9 8.7 10.9 8.7
Nickel and Cobalt
Base
Iron Base 180-320 13.7 10.9 13.7 10.9 18.3 14.6

REFRACTORY ALLOYS ... 321 7.8 6.2 7.5 6.1 8.4 6.6
Tungsten (*5)
Molybdenum 229 10.9 8.7 13.7 10.9 13.7 10.9
Columbium 217 12.9 10.4 14.6 ll. 5 15.7 12.9
Tantalum 210 7.8 6.2 10.9 8.7 10.4 8.4
NICKEL ALLOYS 80-360 10.9 8.7 ll. 5 9.1 12.2 10
ALUMINUM ALLOYS 30-150 87.8 73.2 68.6 54.9 137.2 109.8

500 kg
A - 25
MR.: Rate of metal removal per kW
(cc/min/kW)
HARDNESS TURNING MR.t MILLING MRm DRILLING MR.d
(*1) HSS AND CARBIDE TOOLS HSS DRILLS
MATERIAL Brinell CARBIDE TOOLS feed feed
hardness feed 0.127- 0.127- 0.305 0.05 - 0.203
0.381 mm/rev mm/tooth mm/rev
SHARP DULL SHARP DULL SHARP DULL
TOOL TOOL TOOL TOOL TOOL TOOL
MAGNESIUM ALLOYS 40-90 137.2 109.8 137.2 109.8 137.2 109.8

500 kg
COPPER SORa (*3) 21.9 18.3 21.9 18.3 24.4 20
1Q-80Ra 34.3 27.4 34.3 27.4 45.7 36.6

COPPER ALLOYS
80-100Ra 21.9 18.3 21.9 18.3 27.4 21.9
Notes: (*1) Brinell hardness, Standard testing method, Steel ball diameter
10 mm , Load: 3000 kg, Maximum value about 450
(*2) Rc: Rockwell hardness, C scale, Measurement of hardness of
comparatively hard metals
(*3) Ra: Rockwell hardness, B scale, Measurement of hardness of
soft metals
(*4) Corresponds to hardness of general stell S45C
(*5) Carbide
A- 26
Efficiency of spindle drive system
The efficiency of spindle system can be obtained from the following

diagram according to the V belt, number of gear stages, and number of
bearings.
NUMBER OF UNITS
INDEX OPERATING IN SEQUENCE
POINTS IN TRANSMISSION DRIVE EFFICIENCY
ANTIFRICTION •75
BEARINGS
.so
c
10
9 - . 85
8
7
6
5
4
-.90
SPUR GEARS B
UNDER LOAD~------------~3 --------~~
(PAIRS)
.92
2
.93
V-BELT .94
DRIVES
.95
EXAMPLE:
MOTOR -96
1 V-BELTDRIVE
/ ./'""" 8 BEARINGS .97
< : ~ 3 PAIRS OF GEARS
LINE A: 1 V-BELT DRIVE EFFICIENCY;

X: t·-X
.
• i>(
.98
0.95
LINE B: 3PAIRS OF GEARS EFFICIENCY;
0.91
LINE C: 8 BEARINGS EFFICIENCY; 0. 9 2
TOTAL EFFICIENCY=. 9 5 x. 91 x. 92 = soro=7J
A - 27
Data on rate of metal removal
The rate of metal removal per minute when steel S45C is cut using a new
tool on a lathe or machining center is obtained within the shadowed range in
the following figure approximately; provided that noload torque such as
friction torque, etc. are negligible.
Machines featuring good
efficiency and rigidity
Ordinary machines with

spindle drive efficiency
80%
-; 400
>.-,
0 c 3 70cc
.,e·-E
~]"
.,
!!-- .,
E; 320
'-C 3 0 0 cc
.,o·-E
-"' .,..
~Q,
Motor output P (kW)
A - 28
4. CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL
• Purpose of constant surface speed control in lathe

(1) Good finish surface
(2) Reduction of lathing time
(3) Constant rate of metal removal
(4) Prolonged lives of tools by setting the surface speed to a suitable
value
• Constant surface speed control operation
X axis
x. X=O
Cutting speed;
Vc [m/min]
1-------+---------i Diameter of workpiece
Workpiece o.
Spindle revolutions Na N.
Vc
Na = 271'r [rpm]
Camped at maximum
revolutions of spindle
Radius r X-axis position
v.
Cutting speed Vc
Radius r
Rate of metal removal; Q P,Q

Cutting output; P
Radius r
A - 29
• The cutting output during constant surface speed control, or, the output
required for cutting a metal during constant surface speed control under
a certain condition is obtained by the following formula;
I Po = Mkt x d x fr x Vc (kW) ................................. (6-1)
Where, Po: Cutting output (kW)

MRt: Rate of metal removal per kW (20 usually) (cc/min/kW)
d: Depth of cut (mm)
fr: Feed rate (mm/rev)
Vc: Cutting speed (m/min)
• Motor output required for constant surface speed control
Both required cutting output and the output for acceleration (or
deceleration) for increasing (or decreasing) the spindle revolutions are
required, and the maximum output is required in the vicinity of the
maximum revolutions of the motor.
Cutting output
Radius r
+ Output for acceleration or

output for deceleration
Required output
Since cutting speed Vc is kept constant under the constant surface speed
control, the tool position (radius r) on a workpiece is inversely
proportional to spindle revolutions Ns.
ThQs, the feed rate per minute fm (mm/min) becomes faster, as the tool
advances toward the innermost of diameter.
Assume that the tool is displaced by -ax in the X-axis direction during
6t time, and a change rate
ax represents the feed rate given by the following formula.
6t
dX
- dt = fm =
fr x Vc .......................................... (6-2)
21TX
A - 30
From the above formula, the time required for the tool to be displaced
from radius xl > rl to x2 = r2 is obtained by;
ta (sec) ••••.••••••••••• ·•••• ~ ••.•. (6-3)

fr x Vc
This is the formula for obtaining the machining time under the constant
surface speed control.
A - 31
5. TAPPING
(1) Tapping operation
The tapping means a work of threading a female screw on a workpiece in

machining center.
To spindle
0
Tapper (Expansible or contractable
in the Z-axis by a certain
quantity)
Workpiece Depth of tap hole
Tapping is made by controlling the spindle and Z-axis movement as

follows.
<D Spindle stop ®
b~
® traverse
of Z-axis
I r ®
+R
~
Cutting
@ feed of ®
'
f.,
Z-axis +Z
A- 32
Spindle movement
CD Spindle revolutions Ns
Forward rotation
Reverse rotation
Z-axis movement -N.

®
I
-R
® I
I v -z
I
+Z 11
+R
®
I L_J
®
Examine the following items for tapping.
(a) Depth of tap hole •••••..••••••.••••••• Check if the depth is

finished as specified.
(b) Expansion or contraction of tapper •••• This will affect the
threading accuracy.
(2) Tapping and cutting speed
In tapping work, the cutting speed is generally limited according to the

kinds of workpieces and tools.
\ Vc = 11 x d x Ns/1000 \ (m/min) .....•....•...•.••....•...... (7-1)
Where, d: Tap diameter (mm)

Ns: Spindle revolutions (rpm)
Example of tapping conditions
• When a steel casting workpiece is tapped by an ordinary tapper;

••••••. Lower than 8 m/min
• When a light alloy workpiece is tapped by an ordinary tapper or
when a cemented carbide tapper is employed; Lower than 25 m/min
A - 33
The relation between the tap diameter and spindle revolutions is as
illustrated below.
1000
800
600
Spindle
revolu~
tions Ns
(rpm)
400
200
JL_ _ '-~_u_tt_cin-g-sp-ee-'-d-8_m_/'-m-in_....L--'':----:'---:":---:':':-/-/-/:':::-/-/-:/:':::_/-:~'-:---
.
0 8 I0 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
Tap diameter d (mml
(3) Feedrate during tapping work
Set the cutting feed rate fm (mm/min) during tapping as follows.
Ns x p (mm/min) ...................................... (7-2)

Where, p: Pitch of screw
The relation between the tap diameter (nominal diameter of screw) and
pitch is as shown below.
Normal diameter Height of engagement

Pitch (p)
of screw (d) (H1)
M2 0.4 mm 0.217 mm
M 2.6 0.45 0.244
M3 0.5 0.271
M4 0.7 0.379
M5 0.8 0.433
M6 1.0 0.541
M8 1.25 0.677
M10 1.5 0.812
M12 1. 75 0.947
·p
M16 2 1.083
M20 2.5 1.353
M24 3 1.624
M30 3.5 1.894
M36 4 2.165
A - 34
(4) Tap hole depth control
The hole depth dp (mm) is given by the following formula.
I dp = df + R.a I (mm) • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • (7-3)
Where, df: Moving distance commanded from a workpiece surface to Z-axis

R.a: Machining distance of tapper by means of self-propulsion
until the spindle is stopped after being decelerated (This is
called flow quantity)
dr
0 Tapper screw
pitch p
Depth of tap dp
fm
Fee d stop
&.
How to obtain flow quantity Qa
Z axis Z-axis stop

-z
Linear deceleration is assumed
Spindle
Operation delay time by the time the spindle starts deceleration

(sec)
Deceleration time of spindle (sec)
z
R.a = (Td 1 + 1 Tds) x 6Q
Ns x p I (mm) ••••••••••••••••••••••••••• (7-4)
To decrease the flow quantity, the operation delay time and deceleration
time must be reduced. This flow quantity corresponds to the expansion of
the tapper. It must be controlled to obtain the depth of holes
accurately.
A - 35
(5) Expansion and contraction of tapper
For the expansion and contraction of tapper, refer to tools maker's

catalogues. Contraction is generally less than expansion, and the spring
pressure increases during contraction.
Accordingly, the finish accuracy of screws is said to be better when
threading is made in the expansion direction of the tapper rather than in
the contraction direction.
The causes of expansion and contraction of the tapper are as described
below.
Please examine the motor selection and power magnetic sequence design, so
that tapping can be done with minimized expansion and contraction.
(a) Expansion and contraction caused by the difference between the feed
rate and actual spindle revolutions Ns
Expansion and contraction quantity e: of tapper caused by
asynchronism between the feed rate and spindle revolutions
Spindle revolutions N.
Depth of
screw hole
df [mm)
pNs - frn = positive (expansion of tapper)

pNs - fm = negative (contraction of tapper)
pNs - fm
(mm) •••••••••••••••••••• • • • ••• • (7-5)
fm
The above relation is contrary when the tapper is lifted.

Particularly be careful with this relation when a hole is deep.
(b) Expansion and contraction e: 2 caused by the forward/reverse rotation

of spindle and Z-axis feed timing
CD Pattern A
Zaxis -z
' +Z
Expansion : - f"'
/ 1 (Assumed as linear
: acceleration/deceleration)
~Acceleration
Spindle I :time
----------~~~r---~~~---------------
Deceleration
time -N,
A - 36
Eza = 21 X
Ns
60 X p X (Tds - Tas) (mm) •••••••••••••••• (7-6)
Tds ~ Tas usually.
GD Pattern B (Z-axis instantaneous reverse rotation)

fm Expansion
-z.
~~
Z axis
+Z
-N.
Contraction
Ns fm
EZb = 21 X 60 X p X (Tds - Tas) + 60 X (Tds + Tas) (mm) •• (7-7)
G) Pattern C
fm Expansion
Zaxis -z
~------~--------~~~.-----+-Z
/ __________
: i! T .. -f. Tar: Time required until the

i spindle reaches steady-
1'\. I I state revolution after
I generation of speed
Spindle arrival signal
!
f-'· Speed arrival detection point
Contraction -N.
Ns fm
= 21 X 60 X p X (Tds - Tas) + 60 X Tar ••••••••••••• (7-8)
(6) Examination to minimize the expansion and contraction of tapper
G) Synchronize the commanded spindle speed with actual spindle speed.
QD Control the reverse rotation start time of the Z-axis feed motor as
shown in pattern C until expansion/contraction E2 0. =
Adjust the detection level of the speed arriva'i signal from the
spindle servo unit as a method.
(D Shorten the acceleration and deceleration time of spindle.

Switch gears from low gear to high gear at revolutions lower than
normal gear switching point for the purpose of shortening the
acceleration and deceleration time of the spindle during tapping
work only.
A- 37
Normal gear switching point
Motor
revolutions
N [rpm)
Spindle revolutions Ns [rpm)
A - 38
6. HOW TO FIND ALLOWABLE DUTY CYCLE .
When the spindle accelerates and decelerates frequently for machining, the
motor should be used so that the average output value of one cycle of
operation does not exceed the continuous rated output.
Following is the description of the method of calculating its allowable

duty cycle for a typical AC spindle motor.
1) Duty cycle and average output

Motor speed rpm
1 cycle Dt
Motor output
Acceleration Deceleration
Cutting
P1, P4: Output at acceleration and deceleration

(kW) = 30-minute rated output x 1.2
P2 Output at no-load rotation (P2 = 0)
P3 Output during cutting (kW)
2 2 2 2
p1 t1 + p2 t2 + p3 t3 + p4 t4
Average output Pav • • • (8-1)
Dt
Note) As to output P3 during cutting at motor speed N which is less than
base speed N·b, assuming actual cutting output to be Pc (kW) , the
value is obtained by the following equation.
P3 =Nb
- x Pc (kW) •••••••••••.••...••...•••••••.•.•..••• (8-2)
N
2) How to find allowable duty cycle time Dt:

From eq. (8-1) above, Dt is determined by:
. . . . . . . . . . . . . ( 8-3)
Substitute the continuous rated output value of AC spindle motor used

for Pav (kW).
A- 39
Ex: Find the allowable duty cycle time when acceleration and
deceleration are repeated at no load (P 2 ~ P3 ~ 0) for model 3.
o Continuous rated output: P

av
= Pcont = 3.7 kW
o Output at acceleration/deceleration:
P 1 = P4 = 5.5 kW x 1.2 6.6 kW
o Acceleration time t 1 3 sec

Deceleration time t 4 3 sec
Under the aforementioned conditions, Dt is found as follows.
2
Dt = - 1---2 X (6.6 2 X 3 + 6.6 X 3)
3.7
2
6•6 X (2 X 3) 19.08 seconds
3.7 2
In other words, the allowable duty time when acceleration and

deceleration are repeated at no load for model 3 corresponds to 3.18
times the summation of the acceleration and deceleration times.
3) Allowable duty cycle time Dt for repeated acceleration and deceleration
L
~ tl _,j ~
~t4 ~
L
P1 P4
I I I I I
~ Dt 1
1 { p~Omin X 1.2 2 X (tl + t 4 ) } • • • •. • • • •. • •• • (8-3)
1-2
Pcont
where: P
cant
= Continuous rated output
P3 0min = 30-minute rated output
t1 + t 4 = Summation of acceleration time and deceleration time
x (t 1 + t 4 ) (seconds) .•••••.•.. (8-4)

( :30min
cant
A - 40
7. RESISTOR UNIT FOR MODELS 1, 2 SMALL MODEL 3
The resistor unit for models 1, 2, small model 3 is applied to consume the
regenerative energy of the motor being decelerated. It selection of the
motor, it is required to select the suitable resistor unit for the load and
the operation cycle time. And at mount design, it is required to consider
that the resistors on the resistor unit should be cooled.
1) Types of resistor unit
Type Specifications Qty Remarks
A A06B-6052-K050 1 One 1sn
B A06B-6052-K051 1 Two 30n parallel
c A06B-6052-K050 4 Four 150 series/parallel
Note) Type C comprises four units of type A.
2) Way to select
Select either of types A to C in accordance with the following figures to

satisfy the conditions shown below.
(Conditions) 1. Motor model (Rotor inertia: Jm)

2. Motor speed (N)
3. Load inertia converted to motor shaft (JL)
4. Operation duty cycle time (Dt)
A - 41
(Calculation) The allowable duty cycle time for resistor units A, B and
C is obtained by the following figures.
Type A (1-150): Dt > 179.2 X (JL + Jm) X N2 X 10-6 (sec)

2 10- 6 (sec)
Type B (2-300): Dt > 89.6 X (JL + Jm) X N X
Type c (4-150): Dt > 44.8 X (JL + Jm) x N2 X

10-6 (sec)
The duty cycle time for type A is shown in the figures below.
Modell Model2
~~ JL
30 JL-
0.0016
kg.m. s 2
~~
0.0018
Effective kg.m. s 2
., In effective ., In effective
.§ ~ 0.0008
.§ ~
.,.,._..,<>
...
., ., kg.m. s 2
-uo"'
>- ... I
I
0.0012
kg .m. s 2
...
-uo
<>
..,._.
"'
>- ...
10 I
I
0.0006
kg.m. s 2
Motor only
(JL =Q)
I
Motor only
(JL~O)
00 8 N 00 4 8 N
X 1000 rpm xlOOOrpm
Model3
JL =
40 0.0044kg·m· S2
Effective
0.0022kg•m• sz
.,
~., 'U'., 20
-..,._.
"'
>--
UQ
Motor only
(JL=O)
6 N
XlOOOrpm
Motor speed
A- 42
Note 1) The area at the left side of the curved line permits the use.
Note 2) The cycle time of type B is a half of the type A, and type C one-third
of type A.
3) External dimensions
For the external dimensions of the resistor unit refer to section 1.4 of
Appendix 5. Dimensions of types A, B and C are same.
Type A: One unit
Type B: Two units
Type C: Four units
4) Structure of cooling system

Mount the duct using the plate and fan to cooi.the resistor. The plate and
for should be prepared by the customer.
Example of one resistor Example of two resistors
Air Air
i i i i i i
2m/ sec
Terminal
Thermostat
Plate
....................... .. ................... .
Fan Fan
The surface on which the thermostat is mounted is not necessary to be cooled.
(5) Connection
One resistor Two resistors Four resistors
To servo unit
To magnetic cabinet
Thermostat
A - 43
8. HOW TO FIND THE ORIENTATION TIME
The spindle orientation operation has two systems: the magnetic sensor
system and position coder system. Find the orientation time from a stop
for each system.
1) Magnetic sensor system
Orientation speed
Nori
Orientation end signal (ORAR)
(sec) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ( 10-1)
where: Nori ~ Nb (= 1500 rpm)

b) t2
t
2max =---
1
Nori
(sec) . ................................ . (10-2)
60"
In this period, the spindle rotates a maximum of one revolution.
Nori =55 x K (rpm) .....................•..••.•.... (10-3)

p
Where, position gain K is nearly 5 to 30 for the spindle. For a
p
machine with compact models 1, 2, approx. 30 may be available for
K ; however, K is normally 5 to 15.
p p
c) t31 + t33
t31 + t33 = 1_ (sec) •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• (10-4)

K
p
d) t32
For stable control, set this time as follows.
tJ2max. = 0.2 (sec) ................................... (10-5)
A - 44
The motor operates for nearly the following time before it nearly
stops after the orientation end signal is given.
t4 = i p
(sec) ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••.•••••••• (10-6)
Ex: When position gain K = 5, the orientation time tori is as follows

p 2
at load inertia JL = 0.0022 kg.m.s for model 3.
0.0022 + 0.0022 2~
0.18 sec
Q. 71 X 60 X 55 X 5
2) t 1 60
2max = 0.22 sec
Nori 55 X 5
6()
3) t31 + t33 = 0.6 sec
4) t32 0.2 sec
5) t 4 = 0.4 sec
tori =tl + t2max + t31 + t33 + t32 + t4 = 1.6 sec

The time when the orientation end signal is issued is t i = 1.2 sec.
or
Also, the orientation time during rotation is the deceleration time plus
(t2max + t31 + t33 + t32 + t4).
2) Position coder system
t3
Orientation end signal (ORAR)
t1 JL + JM 2~
T x 60 x Nori (sec) •••••••••••••••••••••••• (10-7)
M
A - 45
t2max 2
Nori Note) The motor gives 2 turns maximum.
60
Nori = 30 X K
p
Position gain Kp is 5 to 30, and normally 5 to 15.
3) t3
t3 =3- (sec)
K
p
4) t4
t4 =2- (sec)
Kp
A·- 46
APPENDIX 5. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS
1. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS
Table 1 (a) Motor/control unit external dimensions list (1)
Spindle control
Type Model name Motor unit
Standard Flange mount Fig. 1.1 (a)

series Model 1 Fig. 1.3 (a), (b)
Foot mount Fig. 1.1 (b)
Flange mount Fig. 1.1 (c)

Model 2 Fig. 1.3 (a), (b)
Foot mount Fig. 1.1 (d)
Flange mount Fig. 1.1 (e)

Model 3 Fig. 1.3 (c)' (d)
Foot mount Fig. 1.1 (f)
Flange mount Fig. 1.1 (g)

Model 6 Fig. 1.3 (c)' (d)
Foot mount Fig. 1.1 (h)
Flange mount Fig. 1.1 (i)

Model 8 Fig. 1.3 (e), (f)
Foot mount Fig. 1.1 (j)

Model 12 Fig. 1.3 (e), (f)

Model 15 Fig. 1.3 (g), (h)
Flange mount Fig. 1.1 (k)

Model 18 Fig. 1.3 (i), (j)
Foot mount Fig. 1.1 (1)
Flange mount Fig. 1.1 (k)

Model 22 Fig. l. 3 (i)' (j)
Foot mount Fig. 1.1 (1)
Flange mount Fig. 1.1 (m)

Model 30 Fig. 1.3 (k)
Foot mount Fig. 1.1 (n)

Model 40 Fig. 1.3 (1)
Foot mount Fig. 1.1 (n)
A - 47
Table 1 (b) Motor/control unit external dimensions list (2)
Type Model name Motor Spindle control

unit
•
High-speed Model 2H Flange mount Fig. 1.1 (c) Fig. 1.3 (a), (b)
series
Model 3H Flange mount Fig. 1.1 (e) Fig. 1.3 (c), (d)
Model 6H Flange mount Fig. 1.1 (g) Fig. 1. 3 (e), (f)
Model 8H Flange mount Fig. 1.1 (i) Fig. 1.3 (e)' (f)
Model 12H Flange mount Fig. 1.1 (i) Fig. 1.3 (e)' (f)
Model ISH Flange mount Fig. 1.1 (i) Fig. 1.3 (g)' (h)
Model 18H Flange mount Fig. 1.1 (k) Fig. 1.3 (i)' (j)
Model 22H Flange mount Fig. 1.1 (k) Fig. 1.3 (i), (j)
Model 2VH Fig. 1.1 (o) Fig. 1.3 (a), (b)
Model 3VH Fig. 1.1 (p) Fig. 1.3 (c)' (d)
Model 6VH Fig. 1.1 (p) Fig. 1.3 (e)' (f)

Model 12VH Fig. 1.1 (q) Fig. 1.3 (g)' (h)
Power-up Flange mount Fig. 1.2 (a)
series Model 8P Fig. 1.3 (c), (d)
Foot mount Fig. 1.2 (b)

Model 12P Fig. 1.3 (c), (d)

Model 15P Fig. 1.3 (e), (f)

Model 18P Fig. 1.3 (e), (f)

Model 22P Fig. 1.3 (g)' (h)

Model 30P Fig. 1.3 (i), (j)
Foot mount Fig. 1.2 (h)
A - 48
Table 1 (c) Motor/control unit external dimensions list (3)
Type Spindle control

Model name Motor
unit

Model 40P Fig. 1.3 (i), (j)
POWER UP
series Foot mount Fig. 1.2 (h)
Model SOP Foot mount Fig. 1.2 (i) Fig. 1.3 (i), (j)
380/415 VAC Flange mount Fig. 1.1 (m)

input Model 30HV Fig. 1.3 (m)
series Foot mount Fig. 1.1 (n)

Model 40HV Fig. 1.3 (m)
Foot mount Fig. 1. 1. (n)
Table 1 (d) Other unit external dimensions list
Name Figure No.
Resistor unit Fig. 1.4
Connector Fig. 1.5
DA converter Fig. 1. 6
Power transformer Fig. 1.7 (a) - (j)
Unit cover Fig. 1.8
Fan unit Fig. 1.9
Unit adapter Fig. 1.10
AC line filter Fig. 1.11
A - 49
screw ....
:....
To fan motor
( FMA. FMB l - - -
rl
a.
a.
~
:I:
I I
iI
PB PA +5V
I® Wliltl® Gru•l® Yllln
RB OV
'TI
45"
...
:..
£ ~
....en
i:
0
i47 -
i70
.. .--
148
<
0
m
,...
282
~
... :;
-a
'TI
ii
s
> :I
ca
Ill ()\ f
~ i"
IJ1
!
~J
0
~ ~ -0
..
It
~I
r--
..c: 1 OJ
~I
:I 0)
1!!.
a.
--i ¢
U?~~
~- ISlI
Air out j
:I
;·... i
132:~ I
4-09 - 368
on 1,6145
(Note) I. The output shaft should be horizontal or vertical

tD
downward.
r")
2. Use hexagon bolts M8, length 30 mm- or less as
mounting bolts.
3. The motor of which cooling air flow direction is
reversed is also available.
2-MS dep. 10
4. For MODEL I H only the motor without key is
022 J 6:8:881 Oil seal
valid.
PB 1 PA 1 ·~v
'®WhIt 10 GIIIIIW ltllfl
ov
CD
OHI
"11
.p·
....
....
§:
147 ..
170- .
148 ~-
282
3:
0 '= ~
~~ ~
0
m Air in
....
....
>
;r
~ 1---
~
,m f--.-
C\1
ro
~
3
0 -.()
lJI c
...... a;· ~
I - ro
C\1
L
ca - -
-
IS)
~ - .:::>
!
•~
..::s
CD
1:::: I I I
I--- Air out
I 10~
!2. 50 5o
a.
i' 15.. 169
...s·
:I
!--------- -~-----
I 45 .. I 318
...
:I

downward. --~
~
2. Use hexagon bolts M8, length 20 mm or less as
mounting bolts.
screw
PB PA •5V
®w•••r 6)GitU (!)YIIItl
RB RA ov
(j) ® <D
'TI
ip' OH2 ss
...
~
UHI
n:
i:
0
c
i47
130
177
289 .,. 148
,...
m
,N
N
::c
'TI
> iii' <:t
:II
I')
t
VI
N
~
1 1 . ~I
~<:>1 ? r---
• <:r! r--- _j tn
.
~ ~~
II
1
i
1 I Fell I fe)l(al I !Fell I .c
0
tO
- -
lSI
!.a. I
I
I lSl
0 c:!>
3'
if
Air out
•
:II
s·
:II
- ---
I
l-------~::c-u
"'
347
.,1
4-01 I
181
on 1,6185
8'0
<:t . , , . -0.036
downward.
2. Use hexagon bolts M I 0, length 35 mm or less as
mounting bolts.
reversed is also available. 028 J
tlicj
6'g:gg_tfi_~
M6_doP· !()
4. For MODEL 2H only the motor without key is Oil seal

valid.
5 screw
PB PA +5V
® W~11! )® Gru•J® Yelln
RB RA ov
., @
OH2
I@ SS
I~
OHI
.p·
......
e; 174.5 ,__ ...
177 . ......
148
-
l
3: l- 289
0
0 = 1
~ 1ft
m
r- Air in
N
~
-:n
0
8~
----1 1::=-v~ f---
~
...0 9~
-.() (")
> 3
0
c ~~
u 0
-
U1
a
:r ~~
I'
\.o.) ca
If)
co lL - - _j If)
- -
~ lSI
""
~ [ 0 Q
CD
E
Air out
~
...:I
CD
~
-q
L
.,, ',.
\J1
a.
3'
CD
:I
"'
()"
:I
188
60
15
63 I
214
I 12
lj
"' .34 7
(Note) l. The output shaft should be horizontal or vertical 8 •0
60~
5;
~~~
downward.
2. Use hexagon bolts M 10, length 20 mm or Jess as ~~
mounting bolts. -
_mill\~_:-~6 _d~E: lQ
R
~~I;\J~:ZJ3LL L.
(8)MS screw
To power line
(U/V/W/G)
/'
To fan motor
To pulse generator
( FMA .FMBl
()Blue ®Biu• (!)Red
PB PA •5V
(i)lUIIt (5) Guu (!)Ttlht
RB RA ov
'TI ® ® t!>
.p·
...
:..
OH2 ss OHI
g . _ _ _ _ 27o I 200
i: 426.5
0
~· I ~I I
cm 208
L_
~
r- 199 55 196
~
~ ~ +;:tr..m1A I
w
::1: '?~ Bl ~(:.3--~
\() ~ -
>
'TI
ii
:II
..c
00
(\J
1-------l ®~dil~
I -
ra • -
~
($1
CD
,...-- -
~ '?
~
L--
VI
.p.
! I'
..c r---r== -
0'
-
CD 0 1----L_. ~ tSI
00
..
~
CD
:II
121
r--
'----
Air out
~ I
a.
3'
1--
I '
•:II
6·
...:II
l
60 )it& 474 1

downward.
~ •
1
r·7'0-;.036
~
2. Use hexagon bolts M 12, length 40 mm or less as <j
(\J
mounting bolts.
3-M4, dep.JO C!l
reversed is also available. _on f/122
4. For MODEL JH only the motor without key is
valid.
( 8) M5 screw
To power line
(U/V/W/G)
To fan motor
To pulse generator
{FMA,FMB)
Q)Biu ® Bluk <DR•• I
PB PA +5Vi
@Wlilt ® GJIII ® Ytlln
'T1 RB RA ov
.p·
......
® ® 1!1
OH2 ss OHI
3
3:
0 270 200
.
c
m
r- 426.5
w 208
'T1
0
199 55 196
I
B~
...
0
>
3
g
Air in A
~
T ~~
t
:I
t:t.
:I .q
~ D'CI f-JI!
U1 co 1.0
U1 ~
! t4
r
I-- p
,--
~~~
CD
..
11
CD
:I
!!!..
h
¢ &
Air out
'---
a. (\J
3'
CD
I- ~ j7 ~ I
...
:I
c:r 170 1 140
I
...
:I
72 . I. 72
60.
135! 226
.I
474
J -
95 .1. 95
220

~ ..,, ..7'0;.036
~"t_M4,
downward.
2. Use hexagon bolts M I 0, length 30 mm or less as
dep.l 0
~~n¢22
mounting bolts.
-----·--
(8)MS screw
To power line
( Ll!V /WIG)
To fan motor
(FMA,FMBl .
To pulse generator
Q) Blat Q)BI&d
PB PA
0R•d
+5V
,I
(i) ..... ,, ®Guu ® Yelln!
RB RA ov
'11 ® II> CD~
.p·
...
:...
OH2 ss __OHij
€ 270 200
•t
l
~.- ~~-
~ 426.5
cm
,...
$II
208
199 55
~Ij:ir inlA
196 ., ·1
G) z B[ ~rb~~
j~
::1: <;>~ <::!
-:;; ..a
.., p
>
ii'
cl
<;>
C\1
I")
•!51 I. 70 ..1
!g)
.--- ·Cf·
i
'----
U1 r--- f--
0\ .c:
0 ~ c.::> ~
ID ro r--
~ Air out I
!!I 0 I
i. 1-- l__j
I
a.
I. 16
i5' 4-~IS,on~215 80
~ 474
II
.j
ill
~
.IIJo:g.J.
(Note) 1. The output shaft should be horizontal or vertical
downward.
2. Use hexagon bolts Ml2,length 40 mm or less as MS,dep.IO
mounting bolts. n ~22 ___ _
4. For MODEL 6H only the motor without key is
valid.
(8)MS screw
To power line
LU/V/W/G)
To fan motor
To pulse generator
(FMA,FMBJ
®Biu 0Bhd @Red
PB PA +5V
®W•ilt @ Grt u ® Ytlln
"TI RB RA ov
.p·
...:... ®
OH2
@
ss
(b
OHI
g
3: .-
270 200
~--
0 '- --t
cm 426.5
r 208 1- -I
-
en 199 55 196
--1
~ir in fA
"TI
B~ l
0
!a 0 "'
t.?-·-
3 ~
J]
~
>
..:r
0
c
:I
'<1
,......-:
~
.. -
If) I
V1 ca , .. 701
-._)
< r-- p ~
!
.. ~~~ t ~I
l_l
)(
¢
lit
...
:I
11' ~
Air out
I
!!!..
a.
..3'
:I
Ir-
- d
I
1£ .J
l
j7QI 140
"'
s·
:I
"'
72 _I_ 72
95 _I. 95 80 .L
r~
226
-1
474
J
220
~
"'IIJoi:g;o,.
downward.
2. Use hexagon bolts M 10, length 30 mm or less as
MS, dep.lO
mounting bolts.
n ¢22
To power line
To fan motor
-----
(FMA,FMB PB
RB I RA I OV
;G> l!iil ""
"11
rfi' OH21 ss I Oii I
...:... To
g r 264 1:
293
232
449.5 ·r _ _, -,
200
m
I
I
I
00 .
• I
...
!'J
II
_u; • t f
-~ ~
I
! I
>
:zN II : I
~ ...~ ~ I "'001
oo %:. ru ~~
:!! II (\JI'
Ql
ci !
I
! I
~~~-W
CD
~ i I
!
CD
.
~
:I
!!!.
a.
4-1,61 S, on 1,6265 I- I IQ .. ,.. 510
~·
aiS'
:I
"' (Note) I. The output shaft should be horizontal or vertical
downw.ard.
mounting bolts. 3-MS,dep.IO
3. The motor of which cooling air flow direction is on 1,640
Oil seal
4. For MODEL 8H, 12H and ISH only the motor
without key is valid.
To power line ( U , V , W , G )
To fan motor
I'll Blue 0Biu• <DRtd
(FMA,FMBl PB PA +5V
® w••'e @Grot f® Ytllel
RB RA OV
® ® (!)
""
.p· OH2 ss OHI
.... To pulse generator

....
- 293 200
3::
0
0
m
,. '-
264
199 35. 232
449.5
r
.t» Air in
.... nA 81 ~
]'J
...
U1
~
,..-....
-
~[$. 1-
:n0
> ..
0
3
i I
I l~Y~({~I ~~~
,.. 90 •j f---
pr-
co
I")
-
V1 0 I
c 0
~ o[
\0
~ - - ~
~
:r
cc
0'0'
¢&
~~I
~ I
-
/~Lro~\
I "''
! I I ool
.I L-_
Air out
Ill
I I ·01 0
. -- I~
~ -.0
Ill
::I
!!. I I j
a.
3'
CD
::I
"' 50
1o8 I 178
259
_I
--I
I
s·
::I
"' 110 510_~- ~ .
downward.
~tq~4J"''
2. Use hexagon bolts M12, length 45 mm of less as
mounting bolts.
~- 3-MS, dep.lO
on ¢'!2_~
\ '-~-
To fan motor
(FMU,FMV, -·····
Connector of pulse generator

~~Bhe G)Biul <DRtd
PB PA +5V
t6)W.IIt$GrtetC!)Yellnl
To pulse generator RB RA OV
i• Ill Q)
OH2 SS OHI
Tl
.p· (8)MS screw
...&
:..
~
3:
1: 82 ·I·
"' 239 501 •I
T ,,. -~
·1
0
0
m
r-
...& Airj i\,@ @)rr LEd ebl
·"'
N ~'=J' I
\\:q7.
1---,
l~
.N
~
C\1'
...&
-'
t»
.:s:.
C\ll
I ~
> . I" ,, "I I--
~ ...;
r-- -r I--
:s:.
-
--,
1 0
0\
0 Tl ~I 0
0 ~
I')
)
1 -
~
r--
(\J
ii1 lSII c:::> lSI

:I Ai r o u l
'i
~ 1-
l
• 1--Jl
a..
CD
~
:I
!!. 20
a.
550
3'
CD
- 110 -- -
:I
Ill
a·:I 6313ZZ balI bearing
"' (Note) 1. The output shaft should be horizontal or vertical

downward.
2. Use hexagon bolts M16, length SOmm or less as
mounting bolts.
045 3. The motor of which cooling air flow direction is
4. For MODEL ISH and 22H only the motor
without key is valid.
To fan motor
(FMU,FMv.-·····
Connector of pulse generator
~~Biu QBJutQ)Red
PB PA +5V
fiWUII OGren G) Yelln
!! To pulse generator RB RA OV
cp
......
I~ II (!)
OH2 SS OHI
- (8)MS screw
~c 347 210
m
...
r
!"
82 239
501
-,
~ 2 l l
:n A;~ ~II
>
i
3
o·
1:
a
~~
t5Bl
:g: t--
1--4---+--+------!~ :lll
0\
,_. ~· &
,. 90 .. ,
~
! -+--- I I I Sl I ~--1-- gl
c::> &
(\J
B 1--- Air o u I
ia.
i' l-=11
~
g'.. Gf9 I ::::ip
121
102 •
1:1· 203
241
.. J_I
110 .I. 550
6313ZZ balI bear1ng

downward.
mounting bolts.
3-M? dep. 10 on 045 3. The motor of which cooling air flow direction is
___J~MS screw _
T'
To power line
{U/V/1~_/_G_,;_)_ _
To pulse generator
'TI
tP'
...
~
Q) Blue Q) Blu• (i)Rod
PB PA •5V'
!
®w••te ®Gttu (¥) Ytlh•

[ RB RA OV
® II) (!)
3!1:
0 01-12 ss OHI
cm
r Air
~
>
.8
w
0
:1:
.<
~
:1: ('o,:. :~,
j ~
~:L
~
g 1-
i
!_!_Q__1
l'
1 _l~
0\
!'.)
-
<
'TI
iii
~ ........ !
i'") "•ji
1111
0
If)
M
IS>
II I M
IS>
:I
ca
CD
c::>
~
'a
A i r lout
-~,
.!..
CD I__
..
~
CD
:I
!!.. ~~-- - - 3_z.gj_ _j''-~
4-019
I
I
CL
i
1------- 384
----1
3'
.CD
:I
cr:I
(Note) 1. The output shaft should be horizontal
63 ! 4 ba i i be a r 1 ng
. or vertical downward.
2. Use hexagon bolts Ml6, length 60 mm
qr less as mounting bolts.
3. The motor of which cooling air flow 3-M6 de p. 1o
direction is reversed is also available. o n 050
(8)MS screw
,
.p·
To power line
(U/V/W/G)
......
:I
To pulse generator
s: (J)Biue I@Biuti0Rtd
0 PB PA +5V
0 ® Wkr It I® GrttaJ® Ytllt•
m 382 ___ ., ,___ _ _ _ _ _ 409 58Q
r-
:---F===~~~~~-
·'?B OV
w
.o Gi ~ 99_-r~-=239 __ -,
~ OH2 OHI
.o I I 1
w i
0 Ai r ·I n
::t
.<
~
0
::t
<
:;;
>
..
0
0
3 _l
I
..:r
0\ 0
w c
:I
c,Q
~ =:>
'i ~
{\J
....
Cll
)(
Cll
{\J
A i r lou t
-~-=-=::IJ
:I
!!!. i
a.. t,.. ____ _L~_:
3'
Cll
:I
,..._ --~-~:_q
-I _I§__
__
~;.:;;_ ___ _
'-~;-~~-J
~r-__,1~0\9_
~
r- •.fJn.Q!J t• ' · I b e -~~
a . -------- -
J
r-~ Cf~J
- ~--~-]
Ill I - . ---
6'
:I
Ill (Note) I. The output shaft should be horizontal
or vertical downward. ---- !
==-~~~-: ~-
--~
2. Use hexagon bolts M 16, length 50 mm
or less as mounting bolts. 5 e\6 d e p • 10 7 'P . - -'.
1
3. The motor of which cooling air flow 01.050 ~ .
direction is reversed is also available.
I
screw
Primary winding
(U/V/W/G)
II Blu It> Bllok lCD A• I
...:...""
.p· PB PA
I> VIIIIII)Oronl® Ytllll
+5V
RB RA OV
[ • II> C!l
3: OH2 SS OHI
0 Joint for oil-air lub Joint for oil-air lub
0
m
I""
t/>4 pipe t- 1 ~,- I1 ~t/>4 pipe
> N
<
l:
0\ CD
.p..
..i
)(
It
a.
3"
CD
:II
s·
...
:II
"On la(PII/81
II
Ollllll85
347

downward.
mounting bolts.
revers is also available.
(8)MS screw
To power line
To fan motor
(FMA,FMB)
• •~~ . .
1
e Blut cD R••
PB PA +5V
., ci)VIIh eouu Ql , .....
.p·
ov
~
:... $
RB
., RA 17>
i: OH2 ss CHI
270
-. 200
--·-
s::
0
Joint for oil-air lub. 426.5
ng position
0 Joint for oil-air lub. ~pipe
m 196
r- ~4 pipe
~ A
> .:r.
~
a- '%
\.11 CD •
~!) -
.
1!t
CD
::I
!..
00
r---
..0
~
0'
Cl.. 0 l>l,
3'
CD
(X) c:> I
::I Air out i

!!!. 0
.
0
LJ~
::I
Drain
(PTI/8)
4 ~IS on ~215
I
I
474
_3-MS, dep.IO
~~/
downward. oo022
mounting bolts.
l-- _j0';21ii)o
_ _ _ _Q_Qib
screw
To fan motor
{FMA,FMB)
..... ......
PB PA
(J)Ao•
+5V
®VIlli t>Gtoll II),.....
RB RA ov
., "' OH2 • ss
(J)
.p· OHI
...:... Joint for oil-air tub
p·.
/ 2q< 2~-- . -· osition
!: r-
264 _, ¢14 pipe
~ ;:;.5 1
~ ~~~A ;1 ~- -~ tY-~
Joint for oil-air tub •- !99
i:
0 ¢14 pipe 232_______
c
m
... ~
I'"
> N
<
I")
lSl II~ • ........_ •
-'--V' •I- ----+--TI
~~ -~>\!.[,;, ~ ~
<X)
VA..U/ ~ "-..U \.~ <X)
::1:
0\
0\
a•. '
r--. ~I' r
80 ,.,
~
0
~
~~~'_j
!I 0'. )01, "!
! 91 ~
~~ ~
1:-
a.
§.
ol
-Q!
0J,
Ul
(\ll
..c;
0
I")
.f I
; i
'i i'
C\1
Ill ISl 1Ar--- ._____ Air outlI
!I... & L-
.1__-+---,.::.;11
iS'
:s
...
' 1- I ' I. 80 j
:Z..
19
,_N 4_J.
D"in
PTI/8
J vi J
I
Drain 1 510
- 80
PTI/8
3-MS, dep.IO
on ¢122
downward.
mounting bolts. 032 h6:g_Oib
Rubber cap
...
N
ll!llho ea1u1 CD R••
PB
t! Vllh
PA
eouu
+6V
® , .....
{
c
RB RA ov "'C
~
• ss ®
w
OH2 OHI ii'
.,
.p·
...
N
E ,._ 208 314 173
B1~ .. ~~·2'
s:: 182 442
0
1;J
0 242
m
.... ~
.,co
.-,
iii
.!
I l£n~n'\l
r--
10
?~
'-1)
""'
p. . ~~
>
:I
CCI
CD ~
co
"<t
I'" 90 .. , 0
-
-
~ ?9 ISl
- 9>~
['- f-
0\
-..J ! ""' - -~
(()
CD 0 ¢ &
.
~
CD
:I
!!.
co
0
I- r-
'---
Air out
a. -
3'
CD
...s·
:I i 10 116 I
...
:I
\ 4-~ 15 on ~215
7
490 I
10 I 4.8 o•3
tO
.q
(\J
downward. 0
2. Use hexagon bolts M12, length 40 mm or less as I
mounting bolts.
3. The motor of which cooling air flow direction is \
3-M5,dep.IO
on ¢40
L -·
reversed is also available. ---------~-
Oil seal
Rubber
tllllu
PB
......
PA
CD Ro•
+5V
ill VIlli eoun ®Yoll,.
RB RA ov 1
• OH2 • ss • OHI_I
,
tfi'
....
N
~ 208 314 ..
....,, ',....,
73
31: 1... - 182 442
0
0
m
r-
55
A".!
242
...
~
! =
~
., 1r tn A B
I~
00
~. ~ h
:n ..0
>
.
8
30
I'
10
- '(()
""'
'<::t
ISl
I~
90
.I
j:..-l
0
-
-
c ~r-
co
0\ a r--..q
- - - - -- ~
00
.i' (\jC\J
.-
¢ CSI
~ Air out
! -
•
i. 110
H I- t7
:II I
!!!.. 17Q: 178 I
9: I I I_ 72 l3~ 272
•3
:II 490
"'cs· I 220
:II
"'
l() I 4 -8.o43

downward.
2. Use hexagon bolts MIO, length 30 mm or less as
mounting bolts.
3. The motor of which cooling air flow direction is 3-MS, dep. 10
reversed is also available. on (>40
Rubber cap
II> IIIII ., 81101 (J) Rt4

To fan motor PB PA +5V
FMU,FMV,FMW e VIlli eonu ® Yollu
RB RA ov
~ I> 01
OH2 ss OHI
.,
.p·
.... 291 173
~ 264
E -- _!_§2____1 420
s::0 232
0
m
r-
....N
_,
,en....
0~ 1=
> .,
iii .r---
' -"'
co
"'
\0
:I
'i
... 01-.() glD
(\J (\]
-"'
0
-q
ISl
<
'CI r'0
(\]
.!..
CD
ISl
..
~
CD
:s
!!!..
I
~1J
Q.
3'
CD
:s
Ul
s·
:s
Ul
4-1/115 on 1/1265 110 466 J
downward.
3-MS, dep.l 0
2. Use hexagon bolts M12, length 45 mm or less as on ¢40
mounting bolts.
Rubber cap
...... ......
PB PA
CD Rot
+5V
tiVIIII eauu (DYtlht
RB RA ov
.,....
'11
• OH2 • ss 01
OHI
291 173
N 264
'-
§ 420
s:: ~ 232 'j
!
~
0
0
m
Air in A
BA h 1/1
~
...
r ~ ~q
_.,
N
....,
U1
'--
<X)
>
-..
'11
0
0
1.. 90 .. 1 -
~,-
f")
-
0
(\J
- -
g nJio
<1'0"
c:>ISl
nJ
..... c: nJnJ
:ra -
0
'-- Air out
ca
~ I 1-D -
!.. - lbz- /
..3
~
1o8
I
I 178
I
I
!!!.
a. 50 259
....3'
~
I_ 290 110 466
s·
...
~
I()
nJ
(Note) I. The output shaft should be horizontal or vertical -o
downward. <SI
2. Use hexagon bolts M12, length 45 mm or less as 3-MS,dep.lO

mounting bolts. onlft40
3. The motor of which cooling air now direction is
Rubber cap
To fan motor ee1u ea1ua CI)Rot
FMU.FMV PB
f) VIlli ......
PA +5V
(1)Yoll01
'11
,p·
I!J
RB
•
RA
., ov
...
;..,
OH2 ss OHI
264
g 36
~~· 173
I IV
182
~
0
,..m
135 302
490
., ~
...
C»
.-a
Airin
~
~
f- JA B i...
lh ~1 - ~
'-!~
~ 1--
-a <0
> '11 ,. 90 ., I")
ii ~ '- -
.......
.....
.; ';?I
0
'? ~·
['-- ~~ 0
-=0 {\J
i•
- ·- {\J
lD
(\J
1'0 Ql5l
(\j
e lSI r-- L-_ Air out
!a. ------- 1---

I I
~·
ill 19 14,_1
a·
a 4-~ IS on ~265 110 536 J
., , ..1 6~8.043
~MS,dop.IO
(Note) I. The output shaft should be horizontal or vertical {\J
-a
downward.
&
. mounting bolts. "'-._, on ~45
3. The motor of which cooling air flow direction is '--

Rubber cap
To fan motor
FMU, FMV, FJ11J
II> IIIII
PB
.,.. PA
,, CD R••
+5V
., 111111 ea.... CI)Yelln
RB RA ov
"11
.p·
(!)
OH2
• ss CD
OHI
...
;., 264 361 "173-
3
182 490
s:
0
cm I_J5. 302
!
~ J$f~
Air in A
....... ~
:vco
~
-
'"II
"11
rr I
lO
tO
i• 90 •i
~
r---
1---
h -
tO
M
-
I
> s
3
I -
~,--
-
0
(\J
C\JI ():
..... g 0'C\11 0·• (\J
N a C\11 c::>&
ci' I, !! - '----
Air out
~
l.. , !~I-l- -- I
~
; I Jr-z
~-~
I I
!a. i i j___:l5 I 95 l1o8 I 178 .. I

~·
I i_ 121 110 5o I 299 ..I
1-- 290 536 - ------
"'6'
iii .. _, 6:8.043
1 1
~
downward. -
MS, dep.IO
mounting bolts. ··.,_on ~45
(8)MS screw
To fan motor
(FMU,FMV,FMW) To power line
· / ( U/V /W/G)
To nulse l!enerator
PB PA +6V
Q) VIlli e DttU Q) Yoll"
RB RA OV
'11
[$ • OJ
~-
.... OH2 .,., nu1 I ,_ 562
-~~
;.,
€ 322 428 190
~ 214 77 328
~ J
c
m
5 52
r Air in ~
~
.ooa ~~ r:--
I~ 1---
8"a F=
II I "'-\~J - f - -
> -'11
iii
::s
(\J
(\J
(\J
o-
1')-
00
?~'
.~
I")
r---
~- :.0 I• -
ra I 10 •!
-...J
• f--
w
,.!!..
~ 0
~
r-- ~ I r-- I- 0
C\JI II I I IK r :')1( -1 Ill I Ill ..c ...0 - - \{)
1'0 0 &I ~ (\J
•~ 0
&
•
!
.. 1'0
& A
D.
§'
f-=)
1'
•::s
6· I 18
I
...
::s
320 140 626
..., ,.. I 8:8.o43
\ ..4-~19 on ~350

downward.
i'~,dop.IO on r/!50
I \.,.
jlO
-\{)
iSl

mounting bolts.
__/ (8)MS screw
_______ _
To fan motor
( F~1U, FMV, FM\11 l',, To power line
'--
/f07v ;w;GT
To pulse generator
~~-
~.,... <D~··
PB +5V
IP Vllh II> Quu 1<9 llll ..
"TI
RB RA ov
~· ~ 18) Ill
.... 318 OH2 SS OHI
;..,
~ 314
3:
0
0
m
,...
~
.-o
.,..
0
"'0
"TI
>
...g
.....
-1'-
3
0
c
I
a> I
r<)l
-'----r ls(\J
...
::I
:;·
:']I (SI
ca Air out
~
'tl
c::>i
!!..
CD
_,
"'=!i
I
_J-----' _j_
I
.
~
CD
::I
!!!. _ 254 . I
~~---------1'I I
Q.
372
3' I
CD
::I
"'
Ci'
::I
-tt_,s·g,., 6?6 J
"'
~~ ~i41
downward.
~:~dep.IO
on 1,650 --
- -~--- !
mounting bolts.
(8)M5 screw
To fan motor
(U,V,Wl
"11
.....
To pulse generator
PB +5V
cfi' e Wll to r• Gnu 1111 '"'"
...N 382
I. • RA ov
715.5
-· .I RB
--
299 (Jl 546 220
98 381
~ ss OHI
~· ~~E
I II II I
s::
0
cm
r- I Air in
lli ~
1-
.~.
r-1~,
~ ~I I ·-1---
"0 0 o- ,---
:;; ~'
IX)
N 1---
0 c?~ C\1
C\1
~ \{)
a 150
C\1
> •I
~:s rg i•
0
.......
V1
.
,i''
;--I
~I
- - - ~ ~I 19;
~
"1:1
.!..
CD
I
!:1
...
lbj
CD
1 ---
...__
!
e: I I
i:s
!!!.
.
0
:s
---.- L :65!
~ 178
I
·I·
I 78 •I A. 170
73
I
J
149
I
I 406
520
.! .I
I
~-
~
1 421
779
-
.I
~ 11~= 170
~~M6~<pl0
downward.
mounting bolts.
reversed is also available. on r/!70
1.3 Spindle Servo Unit
,-
0
,(/ ~
r-
OPTION
_______ /.__ --- .
00
~~r
I
-
N
I
I
I
r--l
I I :
I
I
._
I
L___{ ____
---- 'i\
-
"'
200
280
I 76
300m ax
-.---~-----~------------,
I OPTION I AIR FLOW
y~.IENTATION CI~_CUITI 1
2m/sec or more
I I 4-166
Weight: 13kg·
Mount face
Fig. 1.3 (a) Spindle servo unit dimensions (MODEL 1, 2, 2H, 2VH)
A - 76
[For Spindle control unit] [Mounting and cooling wind direction] [For resistor unit]
[Mounging cooling direction]
~
... v" Mounting panel Mounting panel
~
4-M5
w 4-MS
£
00
r---- ----ill~
+--
... 1J
"'D f--
Ill
:I [
1!.
:r
0
ii"
1:1.
ii1
!. ....
:I
ta
0
M
M 'M
'
'-
0 'C\1
co'"'
C\1I C\1
T ermostat
[ 'fr if
!I
> 1:1.
gc
.....
..... :I
5·
ta
~
...2 17 T so f L7 if lf
84
i0 200
2~
AIR FLOW
cm 244 2m/sec or more
AIR FLOW
....r-
•N
2m/sec or more
N
::z::
~
::z::
Note 1. Cooling fan is not attached to the spindle control unit and the resistor unit.
When using these units, compulsorily cool the radiation section with a wind of 2m/sec or more.
TERMINAL SCREW
R,S,T M6x3
0 U,V,W,G M5x5
0 FMAFMB M4x2
"'
r-,-,
I I I
I I
I
I
I
I I I
I I I
I I
L J
12
CONNECTORS CABLES
CNl R,S,T,G
CN2 U,V,W,G
CN3 FMAFMB
COVER (option) TB
r - - - - - - <Aciiw()'i4:i63m------.,
rc;:;j'"""""1 f'CNTI r;:;:;"' r"'i'ii""1
TERMINAL OOARD Weight: 27 kg
I. 314
Fig. 1.3 (c) Spindle servo unit dimensions (inner ventilation) (MODEL 3, 6, 3H, 3VH, SP, 12P)
A - 78
2-¢10 SEALING MATERIAL 4-Mil
A
"'I 314 ., 295 45 200 / 54 200
ip'
...w I - II
1,..1/
14 - 2
0
-
0
ll==t=-- -- if I 4- -- --
..,... I
U')
~
(J)
.....
! ,_
00
I (J)
U')
Cl)
'5!.
:I
c.
ii'
. :----2_10
.
; c
~ 0
N 0
c ....~
0 )
N
...c.
D "'
2. Cl
c
~
"' 0
co
..,. 0
!HOLE) 00
....
3'
..
CD
:I
6' lJ! I-
200
a
..
>
.......
\0
f
It
l
i.
ct.
0
~-
re.
~ I
I
1234
1
•
37
I
N
_L -----1----
:.. DIMENSION OF HEAT SINK

Jl10
i .,~
t----~=r4
• 200 (MODEL 3, 6) 200 X 200 Dimensions of holes on
0 mounting panel
0
m
I"" Weight: 27 kg
~
!II
w
:I:
w
<
.:r:.
co
...
,"1:1
N
::!!
TOP VIEW
i__ _____ _ _ _0 VIEW from A
-
-
0 200 5,1
-t- I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I' I
I I
1'1I I
;-- I
I
I
I I I
I I I
I I I
~
I I
I
I
'' I
I
II I
Ill I I
Ill
I I
~·
I
'
I
I I
I I I
I I I
I I I
I I
rf I I
I
~ I
I
I
I I
I I
I I
I I
0 0 I
TERMINAL SCREW I
0
lt'l ...
00
R. S.T M!lx3
I
I
I
I
I
I I
~I I I
I~ G M6x2 I I
II I I r----,-,
II
II
II
u. v. w M5X2 I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
L I~ I I I
,.
II
f'MA. FMI:I M4x2 I ~
::::::
I I I
. ::
I I I I
I I
II I < I
I I
I 0
II I = I I
~,
Ill
:- I
...::
I
I
I
I
II < I
-
I
,.
: z I
FI F2 I
I
I ::2 I
::::::
~ <® I
I ::.:: I
:- I
I ~ ~~
'
I
I
~----t ...J
;;;;; I
I
.....,
200 I 54
~ .
tXJN[~~l~>RS
CABLES
H. s. T. G
~~
CN2 [ 1:, V.W. G
'COVER( OPT ION) CNJ FMA,FMB
(A06B-6044-K030) c:
TH
I CNI I I CN31 ICN21 I TB I
I TERMINAL BOARD
I Weight: 34 kg (MODEL 8, 6H, 8H, 6VH, lSP)

35 kg (MODEL 12, 12H, 18P)
c .. ----rr---- ----- -- --- - Tr ----,
Fig. 1:3 (e) Spindle servo unit dimensions (inner ventUation)

(MODEL 8, 12, 6H, SH, 12H, 6VH, 15P, 18P)
A - 80
2-¢10
.............. Sealing Material 4-MB
I
I 314 305 I 200 /. 54
u • • h
12
II 7 i-r-
0
....
;... •"
ll)
.... I 00
.....
w
s
0
- en N
i: '9. ..,.0
) N
D
0 :I
tl 9: 0
"''' 0
..,.
0
m CD 0
ll)
00
..,.
00
r- II
... 3
!"
•
N ~
:I
_:J 15
I~
f---------
r- 200
AIR 0
en ::;· f FIDW I N
:t a.
>
00
.-
'Co
~
..a
N
,.% •
en-
.~ i.
a·
!
!!.
8
IL:J1l - lf\;:::dJ-
3m/secor m 1re
f-1
.I I
/234
LJ. , _
ll)T
II
137
0
L_ --
... :I
• 200 •1 ~ Dimension of heat sink
j-----~=ri-
CJI !!!..
.-v ~ (MODEL 8, 6H, 8H, 6VH, ISP) 200 x 220
Dimensions of holes on
... :I
(MODEL 12, 12H, 18P) 200 X 240
98 ~ mounting panel
-a.0 Weight: 34 kg(MODEL 8, 6H, 8H, 6VH, 15P)
a 35 kg(MODEL 12, 12H, 18P)
________o
314
308
-s~ H-1o 200
r-~Et-i - --4-i:" I r~-,
0 0
"' "'
QC) QC)
CN1 CN3 CN2 TB

I I r-l r-1 ln:9J
I I I r-l r-1 123
u IT' IT'
r---1
I I
r-- - po-
M6 MS M4
I
I ..
I
I
f-- - 1- I ~ I
liS~U
F1 F2 F3 I _g I
_ T2 I I
- - fA
~e.-& .
I I
r- 220V
I ~ I
I...-.
- -® 3 56
•
@) ~ I
I
® ~ li' U\V W G FMA FMB
I
L__ -u.,
-'-- f--- I I \ ------ I [
~I
2oo-- H
I~ -1-2
~54 120-
\screwMS Weight: 43 kg
Fig. 1.3 (g) Spindle servo unit dimensions (inner ventilation) (MODEL 15, 15H, 12VH, 22P)
A - 82
Top views
308 =:jp
'TI
.p· M 195 ~~~4 Dimension of holes
...w DIMENSION OF
/HEAT SINK
DIMENSION OF
SINK
on mounting panel
308
§:
f.
295 1fi
cp / q)
u~ ____ l•
200
298
~
e:
I
I / '
10
CD 1- I 7 193 200 5
I ~: I
~
0
L _____ _j· Fan
:
c:
:II 3).1
;::r
a. 308 ,, ~
a· t
CD
:II
s·
"'
l E•
r=fF~ ,--,i I H- 0
"''"' Hole for he 1----- ,~----------" ---

> ill
iIt
1-U-.1 ~I i
0
a! : :u
()I) : Fan '
w 3
!!!.
f.---<
i Sealing m
g: ~
.:..
L_J
'' :
i0 ~~~
"'"'
lLI ..."'
0 -----...._
0 ~
m -----..__
...
r-
.cn
AIRFLOW
'-3m/sec or
L1l ...JL..._ 1--- '---- --
...
Ul
more.
~
~
...
~ Weight: 43 kg Note) Sealing packing shall
.=r. be prepared at machine
~~~
I[
~
.:! ~ tool builder •
51
I :!00
]in'l~
~·
314 3I5
¢ 12X2 308 220
~
200
~~15
'
1'!'\
\.l..'
A
\]7
r -----, I
\
I
I II
¢24 X2 I
I. II
II
I
I I
I I
I I
I I
PCB I
I
I I
(
I I
I
I
I
I
I
0 0
I
<!)
a:> "'
co I
( I
CN1 CN3 CN2 T8
I
~
I
I I II ll
L _rjl
r-?Y1'"~'"'""
123
I change switch
/
I / I
~Fan motor change switch
3-phase/single phase
1~ M4X3
g~~HHASE
l l l! lJ ~
~ 0 0 101010 0101 ®® ®
<
I;[R s
INPuT 1
T
1
G u v w G
IOUTPUYf
FF F
~¥ ~
I / ~
~
//zoo \ ¢ 12X2
l8X3 j/'M6 X 2 (G terminal)
Weight: 54 kg (MODEL 18, l8H, 30P)
57 kg (MODEL 22, 22H, 40P, SOP)
Fig. 1.3 (i) Spindle servo unit dimensions (inner ventilation) (MODEL 18, 22, 18H, 22H, 30P, 40P, 50P)
A - 84
., A
4-Ml2
lp'
.... CROSS FRAME .,
w (Sealing material
::::: should be touched
by cross frame)
(I)
"0
3'
D.
r··
iD '
!
0
c
:I
:::0'
D.
01
"'..,.
. ,.
"'..,.
~·
0
<D
a·~
010
"'
00 <D
00
<D 0
<D
00
rIt
>
..
!..
~ SEALING
00 iii'
U1 ct. MATERIAL
g
..,.
0
i
0
,..cm 315
....
.r» \ DIMENSION OF HEAT SINK
-~
.... Note) Sealing material
(»
~
shall be prepared
N at machine tool
N
Weight: 54 kg(MODEL 18, ISH, 30P) builder.
~
57 kg (MODEL 22, 22H, 40P, SOP)
~
8
,"tl
Ul
0
~
(See from A)
(for MI2)
4-R7.5 300max. 0 I2-M4
[ I
......
l
--- ----·· AIR OUT +
~~~".r-li ITT ~
__ Jl
2-EYEBOLTfl ! ~~~>-::..
'"'------- I
ij 0 )
- t-
(~ ® +
~~ ""!. C
o
......
UPPER
WINDOW
I+ + T 1--,
l
I
RESISTOR 1 _j' 0
1--- ""
!"lI
.1-
...""
~·
w I '
20 140 140
-- 20
I ,', I AIR FLOW

~ I -, ~ ~
rn
PCB
A20B-1000-0700 I lJ ...
oc
'i. I' ""
~
ii HEAT SINK!
ii'
18
>
~
0
c
010
M OC
0000 ---, 0
C'
.j. .j.
:II I
:;· IIIII
00
0\
Q.
3' ~-J,
r1
I
I
I
0
<C
LOWER II II
ID tF41 CN 1 CN3 CN2 TB C:::::;AIRIN ...... WINDOW
:II
6·:II ,-1 ~ r---1-trl llJl .±- 1 4.5 m1 min
"'
+LJ
>-- .L___ J ,
-~.J
1 ormor,
i0 r---4 .. l
I
cm 1 r~ .
,..
0
1 1 1 Fan umt
Ll (Option) "'
w 1 Standard
2 R7. 5 r-T~ position
""'
I For fan unit (Option) mounting
~
<C
1 I I for
}t
I (M4 tap X 6)
1 L1 mounting ""
I c:t 8
~ ~ '---1
+.!--
15 I
Note)
OIUVW
02
380
450max.
The auxiliary holes in used to fix a unit to a push car when delivery
-* Weight: 80 kg
-iJ
~EBOLTfl
~---c-•;-"J
L.:::.:-::::..-
INTERNAL FAN
w~rM12)
' ·~
4-R7.5 300max.
,' ---/"Jf
. .-----@:
-- --- I
t ~
AOROIJT
- ¢
0
"' 'O
-
O,
C>
~
12-M4
UPPER
-+
,~ ~
+ ¢
Ir-1 WINDOW
I+ +
RESISTOR I J' 0
L_ .....
.,
f--1 20 140 140 20
ip' PCB
ooA
w A20B-I000-0701
I
- ~';.
AIR FLOW ;;;
.....
tn
'D I I -"'
[ ''
u
ii' HEAT SINK
IB
;!
>
0
c:
:I
~·
I
+ IJ~
CNI CN3 TB 11~1 g
c=Jtc"J em + ~ :::
CN2
~
I
-1
--., '
)
I-I--
~ 1-
00
.......
a.
3' I
I lfll Ill''
i
CD
Jl-,.J~AIR\1 -
:I 0
LOWER
!1!.
0 ~ "' WINDOW
...
:I fmir
I' 4.Sm :e
~ L__ ormo
0 t +
c
I
m r--.J Fan unit 0
r ' r I
Io......._J
: I
(Option)
"'
g r---"1
Standard
position
For fan unit (option) mounting
I I for
I r-l mounting "' (Tap M4 X 6)
II)
I 1 I
L-.1.'1
"'
~~~
I
fH~~~
-1-l--Jlt
I5 .
:180
- -
150max
&?
S\\'1' -t ___J_
Note)
auxiliary holes ----/-+-----y]
2-MI!
Lb\t
Weight: 100 kg
i
Note) The auxiliary holes in used to fix a unit to a push car.when delivery
.. 300 max. ·I ·- ......
12·M4
2-EYEBOLT
. ,[ ~! II ~OUT
--::r::
I8
• -
Q5
.•
UPPER
WINDOW
~
.. t
~
ll
...w
If' r·
II+
[(11]
·I
f+
RESISTER t.J l.-1-
...
0
... I
! l'l 20 140 140
t
20
en
'2.
B. II u
ell : .~. I.
..
CL
iD I '1 t AIR FLOW iii
PCB I ~ : ' m
I I •J
:z0
~
c
:I
..
:g
I
I
I
Vl
:;::;.· HEAT SINKI
> CL
§'
...01 .,0
8
Ia
I
I 0 f-- .. 1 +
ID
1'1 ...
c::-
~
I
I ---1 AIR I Nf- -
00
i.0 ,., -~
I 11
00
.
:I ~ ..;
I
I
14.5 m nin
~rmo ' i
11 1111111
i
0
1f4
tLJ
I
~--.:
CN2
l! I
I
I
L___ J
.
- LOWER
WINDOW
c
m
r
.---~
-,.J
I
·r- i - -
---i- ·I +
~ I
I
r-t
1 I
Fan unit 0
::t I I (Option) 1'1
.< 1
L-~-i Standard
....0 I
position
::t
r-T1
I ll1 for ,•
5 I
I c~
mounting
L--:1
~lt J!L
Weight: 76 kg
1.4 Resistor Unit
Weight: 2.7 kg
Fig. 1.4 Resistor unit dimensions
1.5 Connector
~~ymbol :
No. of
Specifications-.......... A (B) c <nl terminals
HR-50LFH 67.9 73.5 44.8 18 50
HR-20LFH
39. J 44.9 39.8 17 20
HR-20LHH l
Symbol Name
l Connector cover main bodv.

--
2 Cable clamp
J Connector clamp spring.
4 Connector clamp screw.
5 Female connector.
~---------- (ill ----------~
Fig. 1.5 Connector dimensions
1.6 DA Converter
30.H6mm
~
Fig. 1.6 DA converter dimensions
M
A - 89
1.7 Power Transformer
310 115 75
© ©~
Terminal M 4
./
/
I _I .
I _j_
I-+- •I
I
I ::!50
3·10 -~ I
I
\
Fig. 1.7 (a) Power transformer dimensions (A06B-6052-J001) (without cover)
:no 'a
@) ~ ~- .,.
~· ). J
..,.
~
c
"'~· "'""
~
~
I+ I +I ~·
·~
"1
~r--
---- ill:+
- IF
'-1!:::=:..
I 250
I I
I. :~·10
370
I 55 150
235
30
Note: All the four side boards are net, but the top is plate.
Fig. 1.7 (b) Power transformer dimensions (A06B-6052-J001) (with cover)
A - 90
370 J
1
b /
~rmina1M6
(0)
_:1_
"
I
I
r '
:;:
;:;
I
I I· I
I
I
+ +
I
~
I
I
I 190
:~oo
I
II
·100
I \Lix.:.!7\l
Fig. 1.7 (c) Power transformer dimensions (A06B-6044-J006) (Without cover)
3"0
I
© I_
(<P)
I
-
:;
I-
"' -...
~
0"'
"'
'-1-
I+ I +I """'
I 300 I
"l
I
400
460
I 190
310
.I
Note: All the four side boards are nets, but the top is plate.
Fig. 1.7 (d) Power transformer dimensions (A06B-6044.J006) (with cover)
A - 91
161 !li
450
© ~rminalM6 @ ;;!
~
/
'r ."
r 4
.,"'
~
I I
~ +
I :wo
·IHO
J\
\A-+h-
Fig. 1.7 (e) Power transformer dimensions (A06B-6044-J007) (without cover)
450
($) C<P) -
.,.
- ,_
I
I
= ...
..
•
"' ....
...,
- ~
I+ I +I ."'
I 300 I
I
480
600
I I. 190
350
Fig. 1.7 (f) Power transformer dimensions (A06B-6044-J007) (with cover)
A- 92
540 170 10::1
/nniDa1M8
@ (9) N
~
/
t!j I
.
~
I I
~ +-
I 300
570
J\
\~
Fig. 1.7 (g) Power transformer dimensions (AO&B-~010) (without cover)
540
@ I.
(,<i') ;;;
1~ r
I
+
0 -
..."' "'
,_ f-
I+ I +J ...
0
I 300 I
I. 570
700
I I. 190
360
Note All the four side boards are nets, but the top is plate.
Fig. 1.7 (h) Power transformer dimensions (A06B-6044.J010) (with cover)
A - 93
660
11;
-
'>OH
v (6 "" d !=
~
~T'h ;-----
!I I 1-
..
"'
"'
I-
I
r' - -=
llr.
300
itO ~ 200
Max.370
\~
Fig. 1.7 (i) Power transformer dimensions (A068-6044-J015) (without cover)
660 -
(<$)
I
<:<?)
I
;
,- f- A
I
J~
.....,."' ..,..,
0
• -
...
,....
~
~
---- lk:r...
--- IE
I+ I +I 0
""1:lf
I : ;
I 300
I. 710
800
.I I 200
400
I
Fig. 1.7 (j) Power transformer dimensions (A06B-6044-J015) (with cover)
A - 94
1.8 Unit Cover 310
I
I
I
I
h
II
J
I'
II
II
II
j..l
I
I
I
fi
II
II
II
I
II 0
AC SPINDLE ·SERVO UNIT II o
II""'
II
II
I
L!
I
~II
h
I
~I
l
{[ -J..I..!-0
J_~
Fig. 1.8 Unit cover dimensions
1.9 Fan Unit

322
Note) The six mounting bolts (M4X8) for mounting' of the fan unit must be
prepared at the user.
Fig. 1.9 Fan unit dimensions
A - 95
1.10 Unit Adapter
~rr
_ ..!..!!._
800
r --.,
I
.Lil.!..
T'K '8-M8
I
I
+ -<;>- ~.I.
-r:r
I
I
I
0 0 I I
.... 0 - -
"' N I I
I I
8-M8
I
I
I
I :::1
I
~~ ~~
I
I
- -
I
I 1
200
760
830
860
Fig. 1.10 Unit adapter dimensions
1.11 AC Line Filter

6-M4x0.7
Fig. 1.11 AC line filter dimensions
A - 96
APPENDIX 6. MAINTENANCE AREA
(1) MODEL 1, 2 and small type MODEL 3, 2H, 2VH
380
•• 250 35
C>
c
View from arrow A
(2) MODEL 3, 6 (A06B-6044-H103, -H106, -H007, -H008)

Digtal Model 3, 3H, 3VH, 6, 6H, 6VH, 8P, 12P (A06B-6055-H103, -H203,
-H106, -H206)
A
View from A
! 384
2 314 50
0
It)
AC SPINDLE
SERVO UNIT 0 0
0 It)
It) 10
-
0
0
A- 97
(3) MODEL 8, 12 (small) (A06B-6044-H108, -H112)
Digtal model 8, 8H, 12, 12H, 12VH, 15P, 18P (A06B-6055-H108, -H208,
-Hll2, -H212)
t
384
View from A
3I4 50 J8q
20
3 14
lO
~
lr
(4) MODEL 8, 12 (large) (A06B-6044-H009, -H010)

MODEL 15 (A06B-6044-H011)
Digtal model 15, 15H, 22P (A06B-6055-H115, -H215)
A
~
View from A
AC spindle
ser.'o unit
I
~ I
// I
/
/// I
..____,_/--""-""---"---'-'--"-"""'----' ~tJ
A - 98
(5) MODEL 18, 22 (3-phase motor fan) (A06B-6044-H016, -H017)
Digtal model 18, 22, 18H, 22H (A06B-6055-H118, -H218, -H122, -H222)
A
~
r----- 384 - - - - - l
View from A
~20~---314 ----+-so
(6) MODEL 30, 40, 30HV, 40HV (A06B-6044-H130, -Hl40) (A06B-6054-H030, -H040)
A
~
View from A
-
0
0
,_-v~--~~~~--~
80
j
00
AMP
8
...,. M
....:l....:l
~~
~~
00
:::2:::2
00 0
000 0
::t MO r-
II II
::t::t
-
0
0
570
A- 99
APPENDIX 7. ORDER SPECIFICATIONS
1. AC SPINDLE MOTOR STANDARD SERIES
1.1 AC Spindle Motor
Name Specifications Key Air Flow

MODEL 1 Flange type A06B-1001-B100 With key To back
A06B-1001-B300 Without key To back
Foot mounting type A06B-1001-B200 With key To back
A06B-1002-B101 With key To front
A06B-1002-B301 Without key To front
MODEL 3 Flange type A06B-1003-Bl00 With key To back
A06B-1003-Bl01 With key To front
MODEL 6 Flange type A06B-1006-Bl00 With key To back
A - 100
Name Specifications J Key Air Flow
MODEL 8 Flange type i A06B-1008-B100 [With key To back
i,____ __ ······--
A06B-1008-B300 !Without key To back
i A06B-1008-Bl01 1 With key To front
i A06B-1008-B301 :Without key To front
~-- ----- --·· - ------
-------~-
i A06~:::~?.?~-B ~02-•-~~~h key To back 6000 rpm

i A06B-1008-B302
~ -·-
I
----- . ·--·- --··· ---·-
:Without key i To back 6000 rpm
A06B-1008-B103 !With key iTo front 6000 rpm
A06B-1008-B303 j Without key i To front 6000 rpm
-- ·-------
Foot mounting type ! A06B-1008-B200 :With key :To back
! A06B-1008-B400 I Without key : To back
- -
A06B-1008-B201 With key : To front
A06B-1008-B401 Without key To front 1
I A06B-1008-B202 With key iTo back

t-
6000 rpm
-------~
A06B-1008-B402 Without key i To back 6000 rpm

------
A06B-1008-B203 With key ---fi~ front 6000 rpm
--
A06B-1008-B403 Without key I To front 6000 rpm
MODEL 12 Flange type A06B-1012-B100 With key ! To back
l
-- --------------
A06B-1012-B300 Without key 1 To back
A06B-1012-B101 With key_ I To front
A06B-1012-B301 Without key· To front

I --- -- ------
A06B-1012-B102 With key To back 6000 rpm

B06B-1012-B302 Without key : To back 6000 rpm
----y - - - - - . -- . --- - -
A06B-1012-B103 With key 1 To front 6000 rpm
r:---------__:__
A06B-1012-B303 Without key 1 To front 6000 rpm
Foot mounting type A06B-1012-B200
----------=-+--·To--back
With key
---
1
--- r-----
---- ··--····- - ---- ----------
r------------------
.. -- ---.----- ·--- ----
A06B-1012-B202 With key To back 6000 rpm
-
A06B-1012-B402 Without key To back 6000 rpm
--- - - - - - - -- ------ -- ---. -------~
A06B-1012-B203 With key To front 6000 rpm
----- ------· --
A06B-1012-B403 Without key To front 6000 rpm
A - 101
MODEL 15 . Flange type A06B-l015-Bl00 With key To back
A06B-1015-Bl02 With key To back 6000 rpm
A06B-1015-Bl03 With key To front 6000 rpm
A06B~1015-B303 Without key To front 6000 rpm
A06B-1015-B400 Without key 1 To back
A06B-10 ~-5-B~~ ~~~~:~=key To front
A06B-1015-B202 !With key To back 6000 rpm
r---------- ---·· --· ----- -- -·----
A06B-1015-B203 With key To front 6000 rpm
A06B-1015-B403 Without key To front 6000 rpm
-- ------- ----------- -------------- -·- -·--
------
----- - --·-·
---------
A - 102
A06B-1030-B201 With key To· front
A - 103
1.2 AC Spindle Servo Unit
Clas- Specifications
sifi- Name Remarks
cation Internal External
ventilation type radiation type
Basic Spindle MODEL 1 - A06B-6052-H001

(unit) control 8000 rpm
unit
MODEL 2 - A06B-6052-H002
8000 rpm
Small type - A06B-6052-H003

MODEL 3
6000 rpm
MODEL 3 A06B-6055-H103#H500 A06B-6055-H203#H500

6000 rpm
MODEL 6 A06B-6055-H106#H501 A06B-6055-H206#H501

6000 rpm
MODEL 8 A06B-6055-H108#H502 A06B-6055-H208#H502

4500 rpm
MODEL 8 A06B-6055-H108#H503 A06B-6055-H208#H503

6000 rpm
MODEL 12 A06B-6055-H112#H504 A06B-6055-H212#H504

4500 rpm
MODEL 12 A06B-6055-H112#H505 A06B-6055-H212#H505

6000 rpm
MODEL 15 A06B-6055-H115#H506 A06B-6055-H215#H506

4500 rpm
MODEL 15 A06B-6055-H11S#H507 A06B-6055-H215#H507

6000 rpm
MODEL 18 A06B-6055-H118#H508 A06B-6055-H218#H508

4500 rpm
MODEL 22 A06B~6055-Hl22#H510 A06B-6055-H222#H510

4500 rpm
MODEL 30 - A06B-6044-Hl30
MODEL 40 - A06B-6044-Hl40
A - 104
Classification Name Specifications Remarks
Basic Connectors A06B-6044-K009 Soldering

(Connectors) type
A06B-6044-K034 Crimp style

type
Basic (Fuses) Fuses for spindle control units, A06B-6055-K006

MODEL 3, 6, and high speed MODEL 3
Fuses for spindle control units, A06B-6055-K008

MODEL 8, and high speed MODEL 6

MODEL 12

MODEL 15

MODEL 18

MODEL 22
Option DA converter, BCD two digits A06B-6041-J031

(DA converter)
DA converter, binary 12 bits A06B-6041-J032
Option Power transformers for MODEL 3 A06B-6052-J001 At the

(Power and high speed MODEL 3 primary:
transformer) 380/415/
Power transformers for MODEL 6, A06B-6044-J006 460 VAC
8, and high speed MODEL 6
At the
Power transformers for MODEL 12, A06B-6044-J007 secondary:
15 200 VAC
Power transformers for MODEL 18, A06B-6044-J010

22
Option Unit cover A06B-6044-K030 Special for

MODEL 3,
6, 8, and
12
Unit adaptor A06B-6044-K031 Special for

MODEL 8, 12
A - 105
2. AC SPINDLE MOTOR HIGH-SPEED SERIES
2.1.1 High-speed series (grea~ lubrication)
Name Specifications Remarks

Model 2H Flange mount A06B-1152-B304 15000 rpm, without key, to back
2.1.2 High-speed series (oil-air lubrication)

Model 2VH Flange mount A06B-1152-B306 20000 rpm, without key, to back
A - 106
2.2.1 High-speed series (grease lubrication)

Basic Spindle servo unit Model 2H A06B-60S9-H0024msos External radiation
Model 3H A06B-6055-Hl03#H512 Inner ventilation

A06B-6055-H203#H512 External radiation
Model 6H A06B-6055-Hl084FH513 Inner ventilation


Model 12H A06B-6055-Hll2#H538 Inner ventilation

·Model 15H A06B-6055-H1154FH548 Inner ventilation

A06B-6055-H2154FH548 External radiation
Model 18H A06B-6055-Hll8#H509 Inner ventilation


Basic Connector Model 2H A06B-6059-Kl01 Soldered

A06B-6059-Kl02 Crimp style terminal
Model 3H A06B-6044-K009 Soldered

- 22H A06B-6044-K034 Crimp style terminal
Resistor unit (for Model 2H) AOGB-6052-KOSO 1 kW, 15Q

A06B-6052-K051 1 kW, 30 Qf
2 resistors in parallel
Fuse Model 2H A06B-6059-K003

3H A06B-6055-K006
6H A06B-6055-K008
8H A06B-6055-K008
12H A06B-6055-K012
15H A06B-6055-K015
18H A06B-6055-K018
22H A06B-6055-K022
A - 107
Option Transformer Model 2H A06B-6052-J001 Primary
3H A06B-6052-J001 380/415/460 VAC
6H A06B-6044-J006 Secondary
8H A06B-6044-J006 200 VAC
12H A06B-6044-J007
15H A06B-6044-J007
18H A06B-6044-J010
22H A06B-6044-J010
AC line filter (for Model 2H) A06B-6059-K203
2.2.2 High-speed series (oil-air lubrication)

Basic Spindle control unit Model 2VH A06B-6059-H003#HS07 External radiation
Model 3VH A06B-6055-H106#HS42 Inner ventilation

A06B-6055-H206#HS42 External radiation
.
Model 6VH A06B-6055-H108#H534 Inner ventilation
A06B-6055-H208#HS34 External radiation
Model 12VH A06B-6055-H11S#H527 Inner ventilation

Basic Connector Model 2VH A06B-6059-Kl01 Soldered

A06B-6059-K102 Crimp style terminal
Model 3VH A06B-6044-K009 Soldered

- 12VH A06B-6044-K034 Crimp style terminal
Resistor unit (for Model 2VH) A06B-6052-KOSO 1 kW, lSS'l

A06B-6052-K051 1 kW, 30 nt
2 resistors in parallel
Fuse 2VH A06B-6059-K003

3VH A06B-6055-K006
6VH A06B-6055-K008
12VH A06B-6055-K012
Option Transformer 2VH A06B-6052-J001

3VH A06B-6044-J006
6VH A06B-6044-J006
12VH A06B-6044-J007
AC line filter (for Model 2VH) A06B-6059-K203
Spindle orientation is the same that of standard series.
A - 108
3. AC SPINDLE MOTOR POWER-UP SERIES
Name Specifications. Remarks
Model 8P Flange mount A06B-0725-Bl02 6000 rpm, with key, to back

-B103 6000 rpm, with key, to front
-B302 6000 rpm, without key, to back
-B303 6000 rpm, without key, to front
Foot mount A06B-0725-B202 6000 rpm, with key, to back

Model 12P Flange mount A06B-0726-B102 6000 rpm, with key, to back



-Bl03 6000 rpm, with key, to front

A - 109
-BlOl 4500 rpm, with key, to front

- . -
Model SOP Foot mount A06B-0732-B200 4500 rpm, with key, to back
A- 110

Basic Spindle servo unit Model 8P A06B-60SS-Hl06#HS36 Inner ventilation
A06B-60SS-H206~n1S36 External radiation
Model 12P A06B-60SS-Hl06#HS32 Inner ventilation

A06B-60SS-H206#HS32 External radiation
Model lSP A06B-60SS-Hl08#HS31 Inner ventilation

Model 18P A06B-60SS-Hll2#HS29 Inner ventilation

Model 22P A06B-60SS-HllS#HS30 Inner ventilation

~06B-60SS-H21S#HS30 External radiation
Model 30P A06B-60SS-H318#HS41 Inner ventilation

Model 40P A06B-60SS-H322#HS40 Inner ventilation

Model SOP A06B-60SS-H322#HSS1 Inner ventilation

A06B-60SS-H422#HSS1 External radiation
Basic Connector Model 8P A06B-6044-K009 Soldered

- SOP A06B-6044-K034 Crimp style terminal
Fuse Model 8P A06B-6055-K006

12P -K006
lSP -K008
18P -K012
22P -KOlS
30P -K018
40P -K022
SOP -K022
Transformer Model 8P A06B-6044-J006 Primary

12P -J006 380/415/460 VAC
Option lSP -J006 Secondary
18P -J007 200 VAC
22P -J007
30P -JOlO
40P -JOlO
SOP -JOlO
A- 111
4. 380/415 VAC SERIES
Model 30HV Flange mount A06B-1130-Bl00 4500 rpm, with key, to back

Model 40HV Flange mount A06B-1140-Bl00 4500 rpm, with key, to back

Basic Spindle control, unit Model 30HV A06B-6054-H030 External radiation
Spindle control, unit Model 40HV A06B-6054-H040 External radiation
Basic Connector A06B-6044-K009 Soldered

A06B-6044-K034 Crimp style
terminal
Fuse A06B-6054-K040
Option DA converter BCD S2-digit A06B-6044-J031
DA converter Binary 12 bits A06B-6044-J032
Fan unit A06B-6044-J016 Model 30HV, 40HV
Transformer A06B-6054-J003 Converts 460 VAC

into 380 VAC
A - 112
Revision Record
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR series DESCRIPTIONS (B-53422E)
Completely revised
• Added explanation on AC SPINDLE MOTOR
Model 1, 2, 30, 40.
OS '85. 2 Added explanation on AC SPINDLE SERVO UNIT
Model 1, 2, 30, 40.
Added explanation on external radiation type AC
SPINDLE SERVO UNIT. I
Addition of descriptions of the small type spindle 09 '88.9 Addition of built-in sensor signal conversion circuit
I
.
0
04 '84. 1 Correction of motor dimensions

servo unit for MODEL 8 and 12.
Alteration of outer dimensions and ~pecification . Addition of High-speed series motor

numbers for AC spindle motor mode (S. 3, 6 and 8) . Addition of Power-up series motor
03 '83. 1 Partial alteration of cables, Addition of specification
08 '87. 5
. Addition of 380/415 VAC series motor
numbers
Addition and alteration for motor model 18 and 22.

Alteration of item 8.5 .2 (Load indicator indicating
02 '82. 7 07 '86. 8 Addition of Digital AC SPINDLE SERVO UNIT
voltage LMl, OM)
Correction of errors.
Addition of AC spindle motor high speed specification

Addition of spindle selector control
01 '81. 5 06 '86. 2 Addition of velocity gain selector control
Addition of Two magnetic sensor spindle orientation
Edition Date Contents Edition Date Contents

- -------- --- ----
• No part of this manual may be
reproduced in any form.
• All specifications and designs

are subject to change without
notice.
GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc., Charlotte~ville, Virginia

GFZ-53422£/09

53422e PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

53422e PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

@FANUC

Computer Numerical Control Products

AC Spindle Motor Series

The following are trademarks of GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

Alarm Master CIMSTAR Helpmate PROMACRO Series Six

ccopyright 1993 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

Series name Model name

FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR MODEL 1, MODEL 2, MODEL 3, MODEL 6,

380/415 VAC input series MODEL 30HV, MODEL 40HV

Digital AC Spindle MODEL 3, MODEL 6, MODEL 8, MODEL 12,

Grease MODEL 2H, MODEL 3H, MODEL 6H,

MODEL SP, MODEL 12P, MODEL lSP,

I. AC SPINDLE MOTOR STANDARD series

II. AC SPINDLE SERVO UNIT (MODELS 1 - 40)

III. DIGITAL AC SPINDLE SERVO UNIT (MODELS 3 - 22)

IV. AC SPINDLE MOTOR HIGH-SPEED series (MODELS 2H-22H, 2VH-12VH)

v• AC SPINDLE MOTOR POWER-UP series (MODELS 8P-SOP)

8. DETECTOR SPECIFICATIONS •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• VII-33

VIII. SPINDLE SELECTOR CONTROL

x. BUILT-IN SENSOR SIGNAL CONVERSION CIRCUIT

The AC SPINDLE MOTORS and AC SPINDLE SERVO UNITS provide vari,'u:-'

(5) Abundant functions

( 6) Easy mounting to NC machine tools

3.1 List of Specifications

Continuous kW 1.5 2.2 3. 7 5.5 7.5 ll 15 18.5 22 30 37

Rotating I-B_a_•_e......csp:...e_e_d_ _ _ _r_:pm_+-3:...':...ooo_-+_1..:.,_5_oo_+-1..:.'_5o_o-1f-J:...,_so_o-l-J,:...S_o_o+1:...':...s_o_o+J..:,_s_o_o+J:...,_5_oo_ 1,500 1,150 !,ISO

Allowable ovet"load capacity

Ambient temperature 0 - 40°C

Noise 75 dB (A) 80 dB (A) 75 dB (A) 80 dB (A)

Pa intlng color Munsell system N2. 5

Accessories Pulse generator and thermostat

AC spindle unlt model 1 2 3 6 8 12 15 1~122 \ 30 40-

Speed control range

;-----------·------- ::~:: ---'-~~~~trio ------ -C~,,~~~~-~~~~-:~·. ~:~ 1 ::~-

0 1000 2000 3000 40~0 5000 tiOOO 7000 !WOO

Motor speed Motor speed

Motor speed Motor speed

4 t-----+ 3o ~i~.-so%_E_o ___r_

0 ._____..._____~-----'------'-------'------' rpm 0 '-------'-----...l......----~-----1.....- ..._______. r p rn

--'--------'----UJ " "

Motor speed Motor speed

,/; lHSkW 30 min., 50% ED

Motor speed Motor speed

Motor speed Motor speed

MODEL40 Motor speed Motor speed

0 1000 2000 :1000 10tH) 1500rprn 0 1000 :!000 :moo

The AC spindle motor comprises the motor and accessories.

(1) AC spindle motor accessories (basic)

The accessories are stored in the terminal box.

Screw sizes for terminal connections

Screw sizes for terminal connections

Model U, V, w, G FMA, FMB, G

FMU} Motor side Cable side

Screw sizes for terminal connections

Model Terminal name

(1) Terminal box

(2) Allowable radial load

Motor model Allowable radial load Output shaft bearing

MODEL 8, 12, 15 300 kg 6312

MODEL 30, 40 500 kg 6314

(4) Dynamic balance

Puley Full key

* Motor balance condition

;-----------·------- ::~:: ---'-~~~~trio ------ -C~,,--:~·. ~:~ 1 ::~-

0 .___..._~-----'------'-------'------' rpm 0 '-------'-----...l......----~-----1.....- ..._____. r p rn